SlideShare a Scribd company logo
1 of 30
‫م‬ِِ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ح‬ِِ ‫ر‬َّ ‫نا ال‬ِِ ‫حـمـ‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ر‬َّ ‫للا ال‬ّ‫ِه‬ ‫ما ا‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ب‬ِِ
Arabic Grammar Rules for Madeenah Book One
The ‫ا‬three ‫ا‬vowel ‫ا‬markings  ‫ا‬ُ‫ث ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ثثال‬َّ‫تا ال‬ُ ‫كتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬
 ‫ا‬
 ‫ةا ا‬ٌ  ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬kasrah ‫ا  -ا ا ا ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬  ‫ -ا ا‬ُ ‫ا ا ا ا ا‬ٌ  ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬َّ ‫ض‬َ‫ ة‬hdhamma  ‫ا ا ا ا‬ٌ  ‫ ة‬‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬fathah ‫ا  -ا ا ا ا ا‬َ‫ا ا  ة‬
)i( (u) (a)
Sukoon  ‫ا‬ْ‫ -ا ِم‬ ‫ن‬ٌ   ‫و‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ك‬ُ ‫س‬ُ
shaddah ‫ا‬ - ّ  ‫ا ا ا ا‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ة‬ٌ  ‫د‬َّ‫ش‬َ‫ ة‬
:a‫ن‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫و‬ِِ ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َّ‫ال‬at- tanween
 ‫ -ا ا ا‬ً  ‫نا ا ا ا ا‬ِِ ‫تا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬fathataan ‫ا‬- (an(
 ‫ا  -ا ا ا ا‬ٌ  ‫ن‬ِِ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬َّ ‫ض‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬dhammataan-  ‫ا‬(un(
 ‫نا  -ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ِِ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬kasrataan ‫ٍا ا ا‬-  ‫ا ا ا‬(in(
When ‫ا‬vowel ‫ا‬markings ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬doubled ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬end ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬word ‫ا‬they ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬called ‫ا‬
‫ن‬ٌ   ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫و‬ِِ ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫(ا‬tanween). ‫ا ا‬The ‫ا‬additional ‫ا‬vowel ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬end ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬word ‫ا‬represents ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬
‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬  ‫(ا‬noon ‫ا‬saakinah). ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬The ‫ا‬‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬  ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬written ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬only ‫ا‬pronounced. ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬e.g. ‫ا‬
‫د‬ُ‫ج‬ِِ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا ا‬ٌ  -  ‫ا‬‫جد‬ِِ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬
The ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬language ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬made ‫ا‬up ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬‫ت‬ٌ   ‫ـمتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا ا‬ ‫(ا ا‬words) ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬these ‫ا‬words ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬
of ‫ا‬three ‫ا‬types ‫ا‬they ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬known ‫ا‬as:a
-  ‫فا‬ٌ   ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬Particle/Letter -  ‫لا ا‬ٌ   ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ف‬ِِAction/Verb -  ‫ما ا‬ٌ  ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬Noun
 ‫ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ ‫ت -ا‬ٌ   ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬house ‫ب -ا ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬went,/to ‫ا‬go ‫إلى -ا‬ِِto
1
‫ت‬ٍ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫لىا‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫:ا ا‬a ‫ا‬ُ‫ل ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬He ‫ا‬went ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬house ‫:ا‬aceSenten
The ‫ا‬table ‫ا‬below ‫ا‬shows ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬properties ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬‫م‬ٌ  ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬ ‫(ا‬noun):a
Examples Translation Properties
 ‫ا ا ا‬ٌ  ‫ ة‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ب ،ا‬ٌ   ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ Masculine, ‫ا‬feminine ‫ث‬ٌ   ‫ن‬َّ‫ؤ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ  ‫ر ،ا‬ٌ   ‫ك‬َّ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ
، ‫ن‬ِِ ‫بـــــتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ب ،ا‬ٌ   ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫طـــــ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬
‫ب‬ٌ   ‫ثال‬َّ ‫ط‬ُ
Singular, ‫ا‬dual, ‫ا‬plural ‫ع‬ٌ   ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫نى ،ا‬َّ‫ث‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ  ‫د ،ا‬ٌ  ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫م‬ُ
‫ت‬ٌ   ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب ،ا‬ٌ   ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ Intellect, ‫ا‬non- intellect ‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫را‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ل ،ا‬ٌ   ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ب‬ُ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َّ ‫ب ،ا ال‬ٌ   ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ Indefinite, ‫ا‬definite  ‫ا‬ٌ  ‫ ة‬‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ة ،ا‬ٌ  ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِِ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ة‬ٌ  ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِِ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا ا‬is ‫ا‬when ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬indefinite ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬specific, ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬general ‫ا‬i.e., ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬
ism  ‫ا‬‫ب‬ٌ   ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ِِ  ‫ا‬‘a ‫ا‬book’ ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬any ‫ا‬book ‫ا‬from ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬different ‫ا‬types ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬
books.
‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫  ٌا‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬when ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬definite ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬specific, ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬general ‫ا‬i.e., ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬
ism  ‫ا‬‫ب‬ُ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ِِ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ا‬‘the ‫ا‬book’ ‫ا‬or  ‫ا‬‫د‬ٍ‫ـم‬َّ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ  ‫با‬ُ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ِِ  ‫ا‬‘Muhammad’s ‫ا‬book’, ‫ا‬here ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬
book ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬particular ‫ا‬book ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬just ‫ا‬any ‫ا‬book ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬general.
An ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬language ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬‫نى‬َّ‫ث‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ  ‫(ا‬dual) ‫ا‬meaning ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬shows ‫ا‬upon ‫ا‬
two ‫ا‬i.e., ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬‫ن‬ِِ ‫بتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬means ‫‘ا‬two ‫ا‬students’ ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬done ‫ا‬by ‫ا‬adding ‫ا‬‫ن‬ِِ ‫ا‬
(alif ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬noon)at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬end ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism.
An ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٌ   ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬intellect ‫ا‬such ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬humans, ‫ا‬angels ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬jinns ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬
it ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be  ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬no ‫ا‬intellect ‫ا‬such ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬animals, ‫ا‬objects, ‫ا‬trees ‫ا‬
e.t.c.
The  ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٌ   ‫ص‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬(Asl)  ‫ا‬ origin  ‫ا‬ of  ‫ا‬ an  ‫ا‬ ism  ‫ا‬ is ‫ا‬ that  ‫ا‬ it  ‫ا‬ carries  ‫ا‬‫ن‬ِِ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬َّ ‫ـ‬‫ـ‬‫ض‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫  ٌا‬-   ‫ا‬‘two ‫ا‬
dhammas’  ‫ا‬ (tanween)  ‫ا‬ on  ‫ا‬ the  ‫ا‬ last  ‫ا‬ letter  ‫ا‬ of  ‫ا‬ the  ‫ا‬ word.  ‫ا‬  ‫ا‬ The  ‫ا‬ tanween ‫ا‬
generally ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬also ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬sign ‫ا‬showing ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬‫ة‬ٌ  ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِِ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫(ا‬indefinite), ‫ا‬however ‫ا‬
there ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬exception ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬because ‫ا‬you ‫ا‬will ‫ا‬find ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬male ‫ا‬names ‫ا‬
such ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬‫س‬ٌ   ‫بتا‬َّ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ، ‫د‬ٌ  ‫ـم‬َّ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ  ‫ا‬accept ‫ا‬tanween ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬they ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫  ٌا‬ ‫(ا‬definite).
The ‫ا‬tanween ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬indefinite ‫ا‬article ‫ا‬corresponding ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬English ‫ا‬
‘a’/ ‫‘ا‬an’.
2
) ‫لا ا‬ُ ‫و‬َّ ‫أل‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫سا ا ا‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ال‬١(
‫ذا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬ٌ   ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ِمْا ا ا‬This ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬house
- ‫تا‬ْ‫هِم‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬ِِ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َّ‫لل‬ِِ ‫ا‬ ‫فا‬ٌ   ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬Letter ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬bring ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬attention ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬alert
‫ه‬ِِ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َّ‫لل‬ِِ ‫فا‬ٌ   ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬letter ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬alert ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬bring ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬attention ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬
person ‫ا‬who ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬being ‫ا‬addressed ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬mostly ‫ا‬connected ‫ا‬to  ‫ا‬‫ء‬ُ ‫ـمتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬
‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ا‬ ‫(ا‬nouns ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication).
 ‫ةا ا ا‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬- ‫ا‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication
‫ا‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬pronounced ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬‫ذا‬َ‫ ة‬‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ , ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬written ‫ا‬without ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬first ‫ا‬alif.
The ‫ا‬‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬point ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬indicate ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬people, ‫ا‬animals, ‫ا‬objects ‫ا‬
things ‫ا‬which ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬felt ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬touched ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬also ‫ا‬indicate ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬things ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬
have ‫ا‬meaning ‫ا‬such ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬‫ي‬ٌ   ‫أ‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬‘opinion’ ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬‫م‬ٌ  ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ع‬ِِ  ‫‘ا‬knowledge’.
 ‫عا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ٌ   ‫ف‬ِِ‫نتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ما‬ٌ  ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ع‬ِِ  ‫اا‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬This ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬beneficial ‫ا‬knowledge
The ‫ا‬table ‫ا‬below ‫ا‬shows ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬properties ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬‫ا‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ) ‫ةا‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ)
Indicates,points to ‫لى‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫ة‬ُ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ا‬
the ‫ا‬near ‫ب‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬
The ‫ا‬masculine ‫ر‬ُ ‫ك‬َّ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬
the ‫ا‬singular ‫د‬ُ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬
The ‫ا‬‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫  ٌا‬ ‫ا‬(definite).
3
It ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬indicate ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬point ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬those ‫ا‬possessing ‫ا‬intellect ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٌ   ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬
things ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬do ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬intellect ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬ .
‫متا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ما ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ٌ  ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إ‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫م‬ٌ  ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬- Interrogative ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬Questioning ‫ا‬Noun
The ‫ا‬Interrogative ‫ا‬Noun ‫ا‬‘‫متا‬َ‫ ة‬ ’ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬ask ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬about ‫ا‬something ‫ا‬
that ‫ا‬does ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬intellect  ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬ and ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬always ‫ا‬comes ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬
beginning ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬sentence. ‫ا‬  ‫ا‬When ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬word ‫ا‬comes ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬beginning ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬
sentence ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬called ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬‫ل ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬‫ر‬ُ ‫د‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ص‬َ‫ ة‬ِِ .
‫متا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا ؟ا ا ا ا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬What ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬this?
‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ةا ا‬ُ‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ما  ،ا‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫فا ا‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ - 
Particle/Letter  ‫ا‬ of  ‫ا‬ interrogation  ‫ا‬ or  ‫ا‬ questioning  ‫ا‬ or  ‫ا‬ also  ‫ا‬ known  ‫ا‬ as  ‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬
Interrogative ‫ا‬Hamzah.
The ‫ا‬‫م‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ةا ا‬ُ‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬comes ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬beginning ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬sentence ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬do ‫ا‬all ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬
nouns ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬particles ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬questioning. ‫ا ا‬It ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬ask ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬about ‫ا‬
those  ‫ا‬ possessing  ‫ا‬ intellect  ‫ا‬ as  ‫ا‬ well  ‫ا‬ as  ‫ا‬ the  ‫ا‬ things  ‫ا‬ that  ‫ا‬ do  ‫ا‬ not  ‫ا‬ possess ‫ا‬
intellect.
 ‫أا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت؟‬ٌ   ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬Is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬house?
‫د؟‬ٌ  ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫أا‬َ‫ ة‬Is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬boy?
‫ب‬ٍ ‫وا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫فا‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ - ‫م‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬Letter ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬answer ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬reply
‫ي‬ٍ ‫ف‬ِِ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫وا‬ِِ  ‫با‬ٍ ‫وا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫فا‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ل -ا‬Letter/particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬answer ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬negation
The ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬reply ‫ا‬‫م‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬reply ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬affirmation ‫ا‬
whereas ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬‫ا ل‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬reply ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬negation.
‫م؟‬ٌ  ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫أا‬َ‫ ة‬Is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬pen?
 ‫م.ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ٌ  ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ، ‫م‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬Yes ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬pen
4
‫ص؟‬ٌ   ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ـم‬ِِ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫أا‬َ‫ ة‬Is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬shirt?
‫م؟‬ٌ  ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ، ‫ل‬No, ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬pen.
 ‫ما ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬– ‫نا‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬Noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬interrogation/questioning
This ‫ا‬interrogative ‫ا‬noun ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬ask ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬about ‫ا‬those ‫ا‬who ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬
intellect ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ٌ   ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ل؟‬ُ ‫ج‬ُ ‫ر‬َّ ‫ذاال‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫نا‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬Who ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬man?
‫؟‬‫م‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ا ا ا‬ُ‫م ة‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ثال‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ -ا‬Question ‫ا‬mark
5
)٢‫ني‬ِِ‫ثتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫سا ال‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫د‬َّ‫(ا ال‬
‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ- ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬Noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication/pointing
‫و‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫تا‬ٌ   ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫هذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫د‬ٌ  ‫ج‬ِِ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬This ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬house ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬mosque
‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬indicate/point ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬objects ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬people ‫ا‬
that ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬distant ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬far. ‫ا ا‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬broken ‫ا‬down ‫ا‬into ‫ا‬three ‫ا‬parts:a
‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إلشتا‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬- ‫ذا‬َ‫ ة‬Noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication
‫د‬ِِ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ل‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫م‬ُ‫الثال‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬– ‫لا‬ِِThe ‫ا‬laam ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬for ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬far/distant
‫ب‬ٌ   ‫طتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خ‬ِِ  ‫فا‬ٌ   ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ك -ا‬َ‫ ة‬Particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬address
Some ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬grammarians ‫ا‬say ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬the  ‫ا‬‘‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ’ ‫ا‬ particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬address ‫ا‬also ‫ا‬
indicates  ‫ا‬ upon  ‫ا‬ far/distant  ‫ا‬ and  ‫ا‬ the  ‫ا‬‘‫ل‬ِِ ’ ‫ا‬ shows  ‫ا‬ upon  ‫ا‬ even  ‫ا‬ more  ‫ا‬ or ‫ا‬
increased ‫ا‬furtherness/distance.
The ‫ا‬letter/particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬address ‫ا‬‘‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ’ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬if ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬person ‫ا ا‬or ‫ا‬objectwe ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬
addressing ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬masculine.
The ‫ا‬table ‫ا‬below ‫ا‬shows ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬properties ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬:a
Indicates,points to ‫لى‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫ة‬ُ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ا‬
The ‫ا‬far/distant ‫د‬ُ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ع‬ِِ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬
The ‫ا‬masculine ‫ر‬ُ ‫ك‬َّ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬
the ‫ا‬singular ‫د‬ُ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬
All ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ءا ا‬ُ ‫ـمتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬nouns ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫  ٌا‬ ‫ا‬definite.
‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬pronounced ‫ا‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ا‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬written ‫ا‬without ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬alif.
6
Some ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬grammarians ‫ا‬say ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ءا ا‬ُ ‫ـمتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬have ‫ا‬three ‫ا‬levels ‫ا‬
‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬ِِ‫را‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ثا‬ُ ‫:ا ثثال‬a
‫ب‬ِِ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫لل‬ِِ ‫ا‬– ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬For ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬near/close
‫د‬ِِ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ع‬ِِ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ل‬ِِ ‫ا‬- ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬For ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬far/distant
‫ط‬ِِ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ل‬ِِ ‫ا‬- ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذا‬َ‫ ة‬For ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬middle ‫ا‬between ‫ا‬near ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬far
‫د‬ِِ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ما‬ُ‫ول‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ها‬ِِ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫لل‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫عا‬ُ ‫ـم‬ِِِِ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ج‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫لا‬
The ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬alert/bringing ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬attention ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬laam ‫ا‬indicating ‫ا‬upon ‫ا‬
the ‫ا‬distant ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬far ‫ا‬will ‫ا‬never ‫ا‬come ‫ا‬together ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication ‫ا‬i.e; ‫ا‬
‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ - this ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬wrong ‫ا‬‘‫ط أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫  ٌا‬’.
7
)٣‫ث‬ُ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ث‬َ‫ ة‬‫سا ال‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫د‬َّ‫(ا ال‬
‫ف‬ٌ   ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫فا‬ٌ   ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ل -ا‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬)al) ‫ا‬Definite ‫ا‬Particle
The ‫ا‬definite ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬prefixed ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬which ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬‫ة‬ٌ  ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِِ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫(ا‬indefinite) ‫ا‬
and ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬causes ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬become  ‫ا‬‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫  ٌا‬ ‫ا‬ (definite), ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬also ‫ا‬causes ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬
tanween ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬end ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬dropped. ‫ا ا‬The ‫ا‬definite ‫ا‬particle ‫(ا‬al) ‫ا‬corresponds ‫ا‬
to ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬English ‫‘ا‬the’.
‫ب‬ٌ   ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬This ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬doctor.
‫ا‬‫س‬ٌ   ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫با‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ط‬َّ ‫ل‬The ‫ا‬doctor ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬sitting.
The ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬alphabet ‫ا‬consists ‫ا‬of ‫ا 82ا‬letters. ‫ا ا‬Of ‫ا‬these ‫ا 41ا‬are ‫ا‬called ‫ا‬Solar ‫ا‬
Letters  ‫ا‬‫ي ة‬َّ‫س‬ِِ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ش‬َّ ‫ال‬ ‫فا‬ُ ‫و‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ح‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ُا‬, ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬other ‫ا 41ا‬are ‫ا‬called ‫ا‬Lunar ‫ا‬Letters ‫ا‬
‫ي ة‬َّ‫ر‬ِِ ‫ـم‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫فا‬ُ ‫و‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ح‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ُا‬.
In ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬articulation ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬Solar ‫ا‬Letters ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬tip ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬blade ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬tongue ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬
involved ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬pronunciation. ‫ا ا‬The ‫ا‬tip ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬blade ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬tongue ‫ا‬does ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬
play ‫ا‬any ‫ا‬part ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬articulation ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬Lunar ‫ا‬Letters, ‫(ا‬refer ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬lesson ‫ا ,3ا‬
pg.19 ‫ا‬Madinah ‫ا‬bk.1).
When ‫ا‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬prefixed ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬beginning ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬Solar ‫ا‬Letter ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬laam ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬
‘al’ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬pronounced ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬written, ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬first ‫ا‬letter ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬takes ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬
shaddah ‫ا‬–ّ . ‫ا ا‬For ‫ا‬example, ‫ا‬‫س‬ُ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ش‬َّ ‫ال‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬ ‫(ا ا‬ash- shamsu).
When ‫ا‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬prefixed ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬beginning ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬Lunar ‫ا‬Letter ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬laam ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬
‘al’ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬pronounced ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬written. ‫ا ا‬For ‫ا‬example, ‫ا‬‫ر‬ُ ‫ـم‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬ ‫(ا‬al- qamaru).
In ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬definite ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬(al) ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬(a) ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬known ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬‫ل‬ِِ ‫ص‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ةا‬ُ‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬
Connecting  ‫ا‬ Hamzah.  ‫ا‬  ‫ا‬ If  ‫ا‬ it  ‫ا‬ is  ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬ preceded  ‫ا‬ by  ‫ا‬ a  ‫ا‬ word  ‫ا‬ it  ‫ا‬ will  ‫ا‬ be ‫ا‬
pronounced ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬vowel ‫ا‬marking ‫ ةَا‬-  ‫ا‬ (fathah). ‫ا‬  ‫ا‬If ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬preceded ‫ا‬by ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬
word ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬dropped ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬pronunciation, ‫ا‬though ‫ا‬remains ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬writing.
‫س‬ٌ   ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫با‬ُ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬َّ‫ا‬ ‫:ا‬a‫ل‬ٌ   ‫ثتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ِِ‫س‬ُ ‫ر‬ّ‫ِه‬ ‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬ ‫فا‬ٌ   ‫ق‬ِِ‫وا‬َ‫ ة‬  ‫ا‬The ‫ا‬student ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬sitting ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬
teacher ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬standing, ‫(ا‬wa l-mudarrisu…).
8
‫يُ ة‬َّ‫ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬ُ‫لُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫ا‬is a beneficial sentence (‫ة‬ٌ(,‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ٌ(,‫ُ ة‬‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ‫ا‬ ), and it is made up
of 2 parts known as ‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫د أا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬َ‫ ة‬(al-mubtada wa l-khabar).
‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬
(1) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is from the Arabic word ‫ء‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫دلا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ meaning the beginning or
starting, and from its origin is that it comes at the beginning of the
sentence.
(2) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is an ism that is the subject of talk or discussion.
(3) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫تتت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫فتت‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or
dhammataan on the last letter of the ism.
(4) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ in its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ص‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ أ‬ (origin) precedes ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ (the khabar).
(5) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ in its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ص‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ أ‬ (origin) is ‫فُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ٌ(,(definite).
‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬
(1) ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is that which comes after ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ in its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ص‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ أ‬ (origin).
(2) ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ gives information or news about ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬, and by which it
completes a benefit with ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬.
9
ُ‫يُ ةا‬َّ‫ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬ ُ‫لُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ُ‫ا‬
(3) ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ in its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ص‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ أ‬ (origin) is ‫ة‬ٌ(,‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ (indefinite).
(4) ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫بتت‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫فتت‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or
dhammataan on the last letter of the ism.
‫يُ ة‬َّ‫ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬ُ‫لُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬
‫ب‬ٌ(, ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ج‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬The mosque is near.
‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬
10
)٤(‫ع‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ّي‬‫رلا‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫س‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬)1 ) is a Letter/Particle that enters upon an ism only.
(2) ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫جت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ changes the state of the ism to ‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫جت‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (majroor),
meaning the ism takes kasrah/kasrataan on the last letter.
(3) ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ can have many meanings and its meaning is not known
or complete until it enters upon a sentence. Then its exact meaning is
known from the context of the sentence.
‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬
‫د‬ٌ(,‫م‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬Muhammad is in the house
‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫كنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫م‬ٌ(,‫هنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫م‬ٌ(,‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ِ‫ّي‬ – ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Noun of Questioning for Place
11
‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬-Particle of Jarr
‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬From- ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬On/Above- -‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬In
‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫كنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫م‬ٌ(,‫هنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫م‬ٌ(,‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ِ‫ّي‬ is an ism which is used to ask a question about the
whereabouts of someone/something.
‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬‫ب ؟‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫تنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬Where is the book?
‫ب ؟‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬It is on the desk/table?
‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬-Detached Pronoun
(1) ‫صل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬ is a type of ism that is used to indicate upon the
‫ب‬ٌ(, ‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫غنا‬َ‫ ة‬ (Absent), or the ‫ب‬ٌ(, ‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ (Addressed), or the ‫م‬ٌ(,‫ل‬ِّ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ (Speaker).
(2) ‫صل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬ you can begin a sentence with it.
(3) ‫صل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬ is a type of a ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬
(4) ‫صل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬ is ‫فُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ٌ(,(definite).
5) The dhameer ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ and ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬ can be used for those who possess intellect
and things that do not possess intellect. If they are used for the latter they
will have the meaning ‘it’.
12
‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬
-‫ننا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ أ‬I -‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬You ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬-It/She -‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬He/It-‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬You
‫ ؟‬ُ‫شُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫عنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Where is ‘Aaisha?
‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ُ ة‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫غ‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬She is in the room
‫ ؟‬ُ‫عُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫سنا‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Where is the watch?
‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬It is on the bed
The table below shows the properties of ‫لُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ُ‫ا‬(the
Detached Pronouns):
‫د‬ٌ(,‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬
Number
‫س‬ٌ(, ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ج‬ِ‫ّي‬
Gender
‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ُّ  ‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬
Indicates upon
‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬
Detached Pronoun
‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
)1(
‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ك‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
Male
- ‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫غنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Absent -‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬It/He
‫ة‬ُ‫ا‬‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
)1(
‫ث‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ة‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
Female
- ُ‫بُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫غنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Absent -‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬She/It
‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
)1(
‫كر‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
Male
- ‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Addressed -‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬You
‫ة‬ُ‫ا‬‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
)1(
‫ث‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ة‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
Female
-ُ‫بُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Addressed -‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬You
‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
)1(
‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ك‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
‫ن‬َّ‫ة‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ث‬ُ‫ا‬
- ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬‫ل‬ِّ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Speaker - ‫ننا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ أ‬I/Me
13
‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ص‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ن‬ُ‫ا‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (Prevented from Tanween) is a Term that is used
for a particular group of nouns which do not accept tanween and when
they are in a state of ‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (kasra) they take Fathah.
This particular group of nouns further divides up into many categories
and from them is the category known in the Arabic language as:
‫ف‬ٍ   ‫ل‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ أ‬ ‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ث‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬‫أ‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ت‬َّّ‫ة‬‫لال‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫يُ ةا‬َّ‫ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬Female Names Without Alif
This category contains Female Names which do not accept tanween but
there is a condition '‫ط‬ٌ(, ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ش‬َ‫ ة‬ ' for them not accepting tanween and that is,
that the names are made up of more than 3 letters. This category of
names is divided up into into 3 types with regards to their femininity.
14
‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ص‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ن‬ُ‫ا‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ة‬ُ‫ا‬‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫مُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ط‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬
-‫ث‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬‫تأ‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬Femininity
‫ي‬ٌّ) ‫ظ‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬)In)Wording- ‫ي‬ٌّ) ‫و‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬)In)Meaning-
-‫ي‬ٌّ) ‫ظ‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ٌّ) ‫و‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬
(In)Meaning and Wording
9in wo
‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ،‫مز‬ُ‫ا‬‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫مُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ط‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬،‫ز‬ُ‫نُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫آ‬ُ‫حُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ،‫ةز‬ُ‫ا‬‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬
The ‫ة‬‫طُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (Round Taa) is a letter that is added at the end of an ism
and it signifies femininity of a word.
The diagram above shows that there are 3 categories of femininity in
female names without alif:
1) In wording and meaning - names which are feminine in their
wording i.e. they end in taa marboota and in their meaning i.e. they
are names which are used for females.
2) In meaning - names which are used for females but not feminine in
wording.
3) In wording - names which are feminine in wording but not
meaning, they are names which are used for males.
The origin of nouns ending with the ‫ة‬‫طُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (Round Taa) is only to
distinguish the feminine from the masculine. And you will mostly find
that with the ‫ت‬ٌ(, ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ (Adjectives) i.e. ‫مُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ /‫م‬ٌ(,‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ٌ(,(Generous, Noble).
:‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬The Definition
‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ذ‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬َّ‫ة‬‫لا‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ز‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ث‬ٍ   ‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫د‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ -‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ض‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫لال‬
.‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ُّ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬
The Past Verb-that which indicates upon an event/happening taking place
in the time which is before the time of speaking/conversation.
15
-‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬The Verb/Action
‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ع‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ضنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ض‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬
The Past VerbThe Present VerbThe Command Verb
-‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬He Wrote-‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ا‬‫ك‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬He Writes-‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ا‬‫ك‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ُ‫ا‬)you)Write!
‫س ؟‬ٌ(, ‫بنا‬َّ‫ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Where is Abbaas?
‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫د‬ِ‫ّي‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫نا‬‫لاى‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِ‫ّي‬He went to the head teacher
For every action we have a doer or the one who performs the action. In
Arabic the doer of the action is called ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ (al-faa’il).
:‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬The Definition
.‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ك‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ذ‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ع‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ (the Doer) is an ism which is ‫ع‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ takes dhammah or
dhammataan on the last letter and mentioned before it is its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ verb.
‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬
‫د‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ج‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫د‬ٌ(,‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫حنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬Haamid went to the mosque
‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬
‫ض‬ٍ   ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬
You will find that ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is not always apparent after the verb ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬.
That is because in the past-tense verbs for the Male Absent if ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is
not apparent then the ‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َ‫ ة‬ (pronoun) '‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ ' (He) will be ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬. And
this dhameer is known as ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ (The Hidden Dhameer), you
will not see it in writing or pronounce it even though it is there.
‫د ؟‬ٌ(,‫م‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Where is Muhammad?
‫د‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ج‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬He left from the mosque
16
The four signs of an ism
There are 4 signs by which an ism is known, and you will not find these
signs entering upon the verbs or particles/letters, so they are specific to
the nouns. These 4 signs can be used to distinguish between the ‫ء‬ٌ  ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬
(nouns) and the ‫ل‬ٌ  ‫عءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫م‬‫أ‬ (verbs) and ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ (particles).
(1) The first sign is that the ism accepts ‫ن‬ٌ  ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫و‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ (tanween).
(2) The second sign is that ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ (alif and laam) can enter upon the ism.
(3) The third sign is that ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ (particles of jarr) can enter upon
the ism.
(4) The fourth sign is that the ism can take ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ (kasrah/kasrataan) on
the last letter.
‫ن‬ٌ  ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫و‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬
‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ج‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫لف ى‬َّ‫ى‬‫ص‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫د‬ٌ ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬Muhammad prayed in the mosque
‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬)kasrah(
17
)‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫عال‬َ‫ءا‬٤(
-ٍ -ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ -ً –ٍ –ٌ  ‫ن‬ٌ  ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫و‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬
)٥‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫خءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ (
‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬‫س‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ، ‫را‬ِّ  ‫س‬‫س‬‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫س‬‫س‬‫تدق‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫سف ى‬‫س‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ال‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ ‫ب ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ : ُ‫ف ةْو‬َ‫ءا‬‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬
‫مف ى‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫س‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫أل‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ا‬‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫مف ى‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫س‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ثءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬.
‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ُ‫ْو‬(al-idhaafah) is a relationship between two nouns with a hidden
particle of jarr, the first noun is called ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ (mudhaaf) and the second
noun is called ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ (mudhaaf ilaih).
.‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ص‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ص‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫خ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ُ‫ف ةْو‬َ‫ءا‬‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬
This Particular idhaafah gives benefit by giving ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫س‬‫س‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ (to make
definite) to the mudhaaf or ‫ص‬ٌ  ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ص‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫خ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ (to narrow down/particularise).
Meaning, if the ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ is ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ (definite) then the ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ will
become ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ , if the ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ is ‫ة‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ (indefinite) then the ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬
will be particularised or not so general but it will not be ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ (definite).
‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬
‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ذا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬This is the teacher’s book
ٌ ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ٌ ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬
18
‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ ُ‫ْو‬
‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬
‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬‫د‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬
The Idhafaah construction has a ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ which is omitted/hidden.
This ‫ر‬ّ g ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ gives meaning to the Idhaafah, there are 3 different
‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ that an Idhaafah can have, (1) ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ (in), ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ (from/part of)
and ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ) ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫)الال‬ (for/belonging to).
At the moment we have only taken one meaning of the Idhaafah the ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫الال‬
‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ) ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ) which has the meaning of, for/belonging to/possession.
So when we say ‫د‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ it literally means, ‘the book belongs to
Muhammad or Muhammad’s book (‫د‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬ٌ  ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ).
(‫)الالم‬ ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬
‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬‫د‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬
‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬
– ‫ر‬ٌ  ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫مءا‬ً ‫ء‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دا‬َ‫ءا‬Always
Majroor
– ‫ن‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬ِّ  ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬‫ي‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬Does not accept tanween
– ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬‫يدق‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬Does not accept alif laam
-‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬)over there-(‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫كءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬
‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬ is a noun which is used to indicate/point to a place that is distant or
far.
‫د ؟‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬: ‫ل‬ٌ  ‫ثءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬Where is Muhammad’s book?
‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫لف ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬It is on the table over there
-‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ح‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬)under((‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ُّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ُ‫ْو‬) ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫كءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ظ‬َ‫ءا‬ /‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫كءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬
‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫كءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ is a noun of place and the ism that follows it is majroor.
ُ‫ب ةْو‬َ‫ءا‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫دق‬ِ‫حْي‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ح‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬The bag is under the table
19
The particle ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬ (O!) is used when we want to call somebody and the
person we are calling is the ism which comes after this particle and it is
known as ‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ (the one being called). There are 5 types of ‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬,
we will study 3 for now.
‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬
)١: ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫دا‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫م‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ (‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫بءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ، ‫دا‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫حءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ، ‫ا‬The first type is when we call
somebody by their name i.e. O Muhammad!, Haamid!, ‘Abbaas!, and so
on.
)٢: ‫ة‬ُ‫ْو‬‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ص‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مدق‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ة‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ (‫ذ‬ُ‫ْو‬‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫س‬‫س‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬ ‫سءا‬‫س‬‫ي‬َ‫ءا‬، ‫لا‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ج‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ، ‫ا‬The second type is
when we call somebody and we intend a particular or specific person i.e.
O Teacher!, Man!, and so on.
)٣: ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ (‫لل‬َّ‫ى‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫ب‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫د‬ٍ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ءا‬‫خ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬، ‫ا‬The third type is when the one
being called is mudhaaf i.e. O ‘Abdallaahi!, O Daughter of Khaalid!,
and so on.
It is important to note that the first and the second types of ‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ end in
one dhamma, not tanween. As for the third type then the Mudhaaf will
be ‫ب‬ٌ  ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ص‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ (take Fathah on the last letter).
The words ‫م‬ٌ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ and ‫ن‬ٌ  ‫ب‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ begin with hamzatu l-wasl. When preceded by a
word the kasrah (ِ‫ْي‬-) is dropped in pronunciation, i.e.
، ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ٌ  ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ط‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬، ‫لا‬ٌ  ‫بال‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ط‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ال‬‫ن‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ْ‫م‬‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ءا‬‫ط‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ٍ ‫بال‬ِ‫ْي‬ .
20
‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫بءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬
‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ -‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫بءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ء‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ن‬ِّ ‫ال‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ -‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬
O- Particle of calling
Abbaas- The one being called
)٦‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫سءا‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ال‬ ‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ (
‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬‫ة‬ٌ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ك‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬This is an iron
-‫ءا‬ْ‫هم‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َّ‫ى‬‫لل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬Letter to bring to attention or alert
‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َّ‫ى‬‫لل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the
person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ‫ء‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬
‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ (nouns of indication).
‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬Noun of Indication
‫ذه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ is pronounced as ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫هءا‬َ‫ءا‬ but it is written without the first alif.
The ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects
things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that
have meaning such as ‫ة‬ٌ ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫قءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‘principle’ orٌ ‫ح ة‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ص‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ ‘advice’.
-ٌ ‫ع ة‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ ‫ح ة‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ص‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬This advice is beneficial.
The table below shows the properties of ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ .
Indicates,points to ‫لف ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ة‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬
the near ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دق‬َ‫لءا‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬
the feminine ‫ث‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ى‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬
the singular or (non-intelligent
plurals)
‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬
The ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ is ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ (definite).
It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ل‬ٌ  ‫ق‬ِ‫ْي‬‫عءا‬َ‫ءا‬ or
things that do not possess intellect ‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِ‫ْي‬‫عءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫غ‬َ‫ءا‬ .
21
-Generally words ending in ‫ة‬ (taa marboota) are regarded as feminine so
when we indicate to them we use the ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬. However there
are exceptions to this, (refer to lesson 4 under ‘types of femininity’).
‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫يءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫س‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ :  ‫ل‬ٌ  ‫ثءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ة‬ٌ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫را‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬‫ ة‬ٌ This is a car and this is a bike.
-Body parts that are in pairs are regarded as feminine.
‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ : ‫ل‬ٌ  ‫ثءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ن‬ٌ  ‫ذ‬ُ‫ْو‬‫أ‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬‫ن‬ٌ  ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬This is an ear and this is an eye
-Also words which are particular to females are regarded as feminine.
‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ : ‫ل‬ٌ  ‫ثءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫خ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫اإل‬This is the engineer’s
sister and this is the imaam’s daughter.
‫ر‬ِّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ - ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬Particle of Jarr (for, belongs to( ,
The particle of jarr ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ enters upon an ism and causes it to take ‫ر‬ُّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬
(kasrah).
‫ل‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه ؟‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ِ‫ْي‬‫ل‬‫ر‬ٍ ‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬ِ‫ْي‬Whose is this? This belongs to Yaasir.
‫ر‬ٌ  ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬
‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬‫لل‬ِ‫ْي‬ِّ All Praise belongs to Allaah
Note that the word ‫لل‬ُّ  ‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ becomes ‫لل‬ِ‫ْي‬ِّ  by just dropping the alif and no laam
will need to be added to the word.
22
)٧‫ع‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫سءا‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ال‬ ‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ى‬‫(ال‬
‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ -Noun of Indication
‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ ‫ب ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ط‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬ٌ ‫ض ة‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ِّ  ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬This a doctor and that is a nurse.
‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people
that are distant/far and feminine. ‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬can be broken down into three parts: 
‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إلشءا‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ -‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬Noun of indication
‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫الال‬َ‫ءا‬ – ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬The laam is for the far/distant
‫ب‬ٌ  ‫طءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫خ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ -‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬Particle of address
Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ’ particle of address also
indicates upon far/distant and the ‘‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ’ shows upon even more or
increased furtherness/distance.
The letter/particle of address ‘‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ’ is used if the person or objectwe are
addressing is masculine.
The table below shows the properties of ‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬ : 
Indicates,points to ‫لف ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ة‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬
The far/distant ‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬
The feminine ‫ث‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ى‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬
The singular ‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬
All the ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ nouns of indication are ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ definite.
The letter ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ in ‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ is dropped when joined to the laam and kaaf and the
laam takes a sukoon ‫لك‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬.
23
‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬
‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬
‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دق‬َ‫لءا‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬
‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬َ‫ءا‬‫د‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫حءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ذا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬‫د‬ٌ ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬
‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ز‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ُ‫ن ةْو‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫آ‬
Al-I’raab-‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫را‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫اإل‬َ‫ءا‬
: ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬
‫سءا‬‫س‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ ة‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫خ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫تال‬ِ‫ْي‬‫خ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫س‬‫س‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫خ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ي‬ِ‫ْي‬‫غ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ : ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫را‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬
.‫ا‬ً‫ير‬ْ‫م‬‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫تدق‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ءا‬ً‫فاظ‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬
The Definition: 
The I’raab is:  Changing of the endings of the words because of the
changing of the active elements entering upon them (the change is)
apparent or not-apparent.
‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫حءال‬َ‫ءا‬
The cases of the
ism
‫ي ة‬َّ‫ى‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ص‬ْ‫م‬ ‫األ‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫را‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫عال‬َ‫ءا‬ ُ‫ْو‬
The origin signs of ‘Iraab
‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫را‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬
Types of ‘Iraab
‫ع‬ٌ  ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ - /-ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ع‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ال‬َ‫ءا‬
‫ب‬ٌ  ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ص‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ -ً/ َ‫ءا‬- ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ص‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬َ‫ءا‬
‫ر‬ٌ  ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٍ- / ِ‫ْي‬- ‫ر‬ُّ  ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬
The above definition for I’raab mentions the ending of words changing
what is meant by this is the changing of vowel markings that are on the
end or last letter of a word. It also mentions that it is the active elements
that enter upon a word that cause the change at the ending of a word, an
example of active elements are the ‫ف‬ٌ  ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ (letters/particles). The active
element is called ‫ل‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫عءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ (al-‘aamil) in Arabic and the plural is ‫ل‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬.
24
The definition also mentions that the change of a word can be apparent or
not apparent. What is meant by ‫ا‬َ ‫فاظ‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ  apparent change is when the vowel
markings at the end of a word can be pronounced and when the vowel
markings at the end of a word cannot be pronounced then the change is
‫ر ا‬ً‫ ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫تدق‬َ  not apparent. This part will be explained in more depth later.
The table above illustrates types of I’raab and its origin signs.
‫ع‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ (ar-raf’u) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a dhammah
or dhammataan ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ت‬ٌ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ /‫ت‬ُ )
‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ص‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ ال‬(an-nasbu) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a fatha
or fathataan ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫تا‬‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ / ً‫ ا‬‫ت‬َ 
‫ر‬ُّ  ‫ج‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (al-jarru) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a khasrah or
khasrataan ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ت‬ٍ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ /‫ت‬ِ‫ي‬
Also when an ism is in the state of ‫ع‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ (ar-raf’u) it is called ‫ع‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ُ )‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ 
(marfoo’).
When an ism is in the state of ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ص‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ ال‬ (an-nasbu) it is called ‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ 
mansoob).
When an ism is in the state of ‫ر‬ُّ  ‫ج‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (al-jarru) it is called ‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ 
(majroor).
( ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (
‫ه‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ع‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ 
‫ض‬ٍ ‫ما‬َ  ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ 
‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ز‬َ  ‫ح‬َ  ‫ب‬َ َ ‫ذ‬ : ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ثا‬َ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬‫د‬ٌ‫ج‬َ  ‫جا‬َ  ‫د‬َّ‫ ال‬‫ة‬‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫بال‬ِ‫ي‬ َ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬Zayd slaughtered the chicken
with the knife.
( ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ( ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ح‬َ 
25
‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ع‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫فا‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬‫ع‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ُ )‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ 
The example above shows the three types of I’raab , ‫د‬ٌ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ز‬َ  is ‫ع‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ُ )‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ  the
‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ  (active element) which is causing it to be ‫ع‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ُ )‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ  is the ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ي‬
‫ض‬ٍ ‫ما‬َ  (past tense verb) ‫ح‬َ  ‫ب‬َ ‫ذ‬َ ,‫جة‬َ  ‫جا‬َ  ‫د‬َّ‫ ال‬ َ is ‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ  (active
element) which is causing it to be ‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  is the ‫ض‬ٍ ‫ما‬َ  ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ي‬ (past tense
verb) ‫ين‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ ال‬ ,‫ح‬َ  ‫ب‬َ ‫ذ‬َ  ِ‫ي‬(knife) is ‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ  the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ  (active element) which
is causing it to be ‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ  is the ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬ ) ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ح‬َ  ) .
The words which fall into the definition of I’raab as mentioned above are
known in Arabic as ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ  ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) (mu’rab).
‫ء‬ُ ) ‫نا‬َ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬(al-binaa)
‫ء‬ُ ) ‫نا‬َ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬‫ ال‬ (al-binaa) are words which do not show change in their endings and
they are considered by the grammarians to be the opposite of words
which take ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ر ا‬َ  ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬ (al-I’raab), as mentioned above. The words which
fall into this category are called ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  (mabni).
‫ي‬ِّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َ .‫ها‬َ  ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ة‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬َ ‫خ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫د ا‬َّ‫ ال‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫و ا‬َ  ‫ع‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ب‬َ ‫س‬َ  ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ه‬ُ )‫ر‬ُ ) ‫خ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫آ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ي‬َّ‫غ‬َ  ‫ت‬َ ‫ي‬َ  ‫ل‬ ‫ما‬َ  :  ِ‫ي‬
Definition of ‫ي‬ٍّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  (mabniyy):  That which it’s ending doesn’t change
because of the active elements entering upon it.
The definition explains that words which are ‫ي‬ِّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  their endings do not
change because of the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫و ا‬َ  ‫ع‬َ  (active elements) entering upon them, but
rather they are built upon one ending which doesn’t change at all.
However, these words can grammatically have a place in I’raab but they
will be in the position or state of ‫ر‬ُّ  ‫ج‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬،‫با‬ُ ) ‫ص‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫عا، ال‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ due to their place
in the sentence. This point will be elaborated upon later.
26
..... ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ 
Built upon……
‫ثلة‬ِ‫ي‬‫م‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫أ‬ ٌ
Examples
‫ء‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫نا‬َ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ع‬ُ ) ‫و ا‬َ  ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫أ‬
Types of Al-binaa
‫للللل ى‬‫ل‬‫ل‬َ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫للللل‬‫ل‬‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ 
‫ن‬ٍ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ )
‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ي‬ ،‫ما‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ن‬َ  ،‫ اا‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ذ‬‫ه‬ ،‫نا‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ  -ْ‫اظ‬ -‫ن‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ )
‫ة‬ٍ ‫م‬َّ ‫ض‬َ  ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  ‫ث‬ُ ) ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ح‬َ  ،‫نا‬ُ ) ‫ح‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ن‬َ  -ُ ) -ٌ‫مة‬َّ ‫ض‬َ 
‫ة‬ٍ ‫ح‬َ  ‫ت‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ف‬َ  ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  ‫ت‬َ  ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫أ‬ ،‫با‬َ  ‫ه‬َ  ‫ذ‬َ  ،‫نا‬َ  ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫أ‬ -َ  - ٌ‫حة‬َ  ‫ت‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ف‬َ 
‫ة‬ٍ‫ر‬َ  ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬َ  ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  ‫ء‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ؤل‬ُ ) ‫ه‬َ  ،‫لا‬ِ‫ي‬ ،‫تا‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫أ‬ ،‫ها‬ِ‫ي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ي‬‫ه‬َ  -ِ‫ي‬ -ٌ‫رة‬َ  ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬َ 
The table above shows that words which are ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  can fall into four types
of endings which do not change due to the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫و ا‬َ  ‫ع‬َ  entering upon them,
rather they are fixed or built upon that particular ending. There are four
possible endings, ‫رة‬َ  ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬َ  ،‫حةا‬َ  ‫ت‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ف‬َ  ،‫مةا‬َّ ‫ض‬َ  ،‫نا‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ ) .
‫ه‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ ‫إ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضا‬َ  ‫م‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضا‬َ  ‫م‬ُ )
‫م‬َ  ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫تا‬َ ‫ك‬ِ‫ي‬ : ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ثا‬َ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫هذ ا؟‬Whose book is this?
‫ن‬ٍ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ 
The above example shows that the word ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ  is ‫ه‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ ‫إ‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضا‬َ  ‫م‬ُ ) and we
know that the mudhaaf ilaih is always majroor (takes kasrah), however
the word ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ  (who) is ‫ن‬ٍ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  (built upon a sukoon) so the
ending will always show a sukoon even though it is in the position or
state of ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (al-jarr) due to its place in the sentence. So the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ 
(active element) does not affect the ending of a word that is ‫ي‬ٌّ  ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ 
(mabni).
27
)٨‫ن‬ُ ) ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ الثا‬ ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ ال‬ (
‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬-(Badal-al)
‫دأ‬َ ‫ت‬َ ‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬ُ ) ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬‫بر‬َ ‫خ‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ُ )
‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ُ ) ‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬.‫ر‬ٌ ‫ج‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫تا‬َ This man is a trader.
‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬)al-badal(
In the above example the ism ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ُ ) ‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ is grammatically known as ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬
(al-badal), it used in a sentence in order to give ‫د‬ٌ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َ  (emphasis) and
‫ن‬ٌ ‫يا‬َ ‫ب‬َ  (clarity or explanation) to the word that precedes it. So in the above
example the ism ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ُ ) ‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ is giving emphasis and clarity to the word ‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬َ  , it
is telling us that the one being indicated to is ‘the man’.It can also be
understood that the badal is the same the thing as the word which
precedes it, i.e. the man is the one being indicated to and the one being
indicated to is the man.
Another example can be used to explain this, if I had a book in my hand
which I was indicating to and I said to my teacher, ‘this is new’ '‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬َ 
‫د‬ٌ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫ج‬َ  '. It would be understood that the book is new and if I was to
mention the book in my sentence I would say in Arabic,‫ب‬ُ ) ‫كتا‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬َ 
‫د‬ٌ‫ي‬ِ‫ي‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫ج‬َ  . By mentioning '‫ب‬ُ ) ‫كتا‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬', I have put a ‫دة‬َ ‫يا‬َ ‫ز‬ِ‫ي‬ ٌ(extra or additional
word in the sentence which is known as ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (al-badal). It is important
to note here that if I were to say in Arabic, ‘‫ب‬ُ ) ‫كتا‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬َ  ’ this would not
be considered to be a complete or beneficial sentence. To make it a
beneficial sentence we must add a ‫ر‬ٌ ‫ب‬َ ‫خ‬َ  (khabar), as shown in the example
28
above. The subject of ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ and the types of al-badal will be covered
later on inshaallaah.
‫ر‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫مدق‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬‫ر‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫مدق‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬
‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ل‬‫ل‬‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫د‬َ ‫م‬ُ ) ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬َ ‫لا‬‫ل‬‫ك‬َ  ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬ِ‫ي‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫م‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫أ‬َ ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ل‬‫ل‬‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ل‬ِ‫ي‬‫لا‬‫ل‬‫ط‬َّ ‫ ال‬ ‫و‬َ ‫ر‬َّ ‫ل‬‫ل‬‫ت‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬َ  ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫إ‬ِ‫ي‬.‫ ا‬The teacher is from
America and the student is from England.
‫ل ى‬َ ‫إ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ب‬َ  ‫ه‬َ  ‫ذ‬َ  ‫د‬ٌ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫حا‬َ ‫ف ى‬َ ‫ش‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َ ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬.Hamid went to the hospital.
‫ر‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫مدق‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬
: ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ ال‬ٌ‫حة‬َ  ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬ُ )‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ  ٌ‫مة‬َ  ‫ز‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬َ  ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ل‬ِ‫ي‬‫أ‬َ  ‫ه‬ُ )‫ر‬ُ ) ‫خ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫آ‬ ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ  ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) ‫م‬ٌ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ ا‬ ‫و‬َ  ‫ه‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫مدق‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬
.‫ت‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫كا‬َ  ‫ر‬َ  ‫ح‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ع‬ُ ) ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ج‬َ  ‫ه‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ ‫ع‬َ  ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫د‬َّ‫دق‬َ ‫ت‬ُ ) ‫و‬َ  ‫ها‬َ  ‫ل‬َ ‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ق‬َ  ‫ما‬َ 
Definition:  al-ismul-maqsoor, it is an ism mu’rab which has an
inseparable or binding alif on its end and the letter before it takes a fatha
and all the vowel markings on it are not apparent.
The words ‫ف ى‬َ ‫ش‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َ ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) ،‫ر اا‬َّ ‫ت‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬َ  ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫إ‬ِ‫ي‬،‫س ىا‬َ  ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) ،‫كاا‬َ  ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫م‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫أ‬َ  all end with an binding alif
or the letter ‫ى‬ which looks like the letter ‫ي‬ (ya) except that it doesn’t
have the two dots but it is pronounced as an alif. Also the ismul-maqsoor
is ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ  ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) (mu’rab) it takes ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ر ا‬َ  ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬َ  (al-I’raab) but the I’raab is ‫ر‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫تدق‬َ 
(taqdeer) not apparent. The examples above illustrate this, the ismul-
maqsoor (nouns ending with the binding alif at the end) are preceded by
‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ح‬ُ ) but the change caused by the ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ح‬ُ ) is not apparent,
the case of ‫ر‬ُّ  ‫ج‬َ  ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬َ  (al-jarr) cannot be seen. The Ismul-maqsoor falls into
one of the categories or types of words where the I’raab is ‫ر ا‬ً‫ ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫تدق‬َ  (please
refer back to the definition of I’raab).
29
30

More Related Content

Similar to Grammar rules of Madeenah book1

Magic method of fill in the blanks
Magic method of fill in the blanksMagic method of fill in the blanks
Magic method of fill in the blanksM A Kabir
 
Question 2b: Language
Question 2b: LanguageQuestion 2b: Language
Question 2b: LanguageSuzie Allen
 
Professor Michael Hoey: The hidden similarities across languages - some good ...
Professor Michael Hoey: The hidden similarities across languages - some good ...Professor Michael Hoey: The hidden similarities across languages - some good ...
Professor Michael Hoey: The hidden similarities across languages - some good ...eaquals
 
English grammar part 3{mob}(bcs,job,university exam)
English grammar part 3{mob}(bcs,job,university exam)English grammar part 3{mob}(bcs,job,university exam)
English grammar part 3{mob}(bcs,job,university exam)SM Lalon
 
Dictionary tutorial
Dictionary tutorialDictionary tutorial
Dictionary tutorialclynnc
 
Lesson 19 | Use of Words on Scale أفعل | Learn Arabic to Understand the Qura...
Lesson 19 | Use of Words on Scale أفعل  | Learn Arabic to Understand the Qura...Lesson 19 | Use of Words on Scale أفعل  | Learn Arabic to Understand the Qura...
Lesson 19 | Use of Words on Scale أفعل | Learn Arabic to Understand the Qura...E-Learning Centre
 
Proagree
ProagreeProagree
Proagreeperezre
 
Learn qur'an terminology worksheet
Learn qur'an terminology worksheetLearn qur'an terminology worksheet
Learn qur'an terminology worksheetDina Aboubasha
 
language skills editing updated
language skills editing updatedlanguage skills editing updated
language skills editing updatedKiran
 
En childrens course_02
En childrens course_02En childrens course_02
En childrens course_02Arab Muslim
 
En childrens course_02
En childrens course_02En childrens course_02
En childrens course_02Arab Muslim
 
Bawm lei hen thumal pehtlaitir a herh zia thu tawite
Bawm lei hen thumal pehtlaitir a herh zia thu tawiteBawm lei hen thumal pehtlaitir a herh zia thu tawite
Bawm lei hen thumal pehtlaitir a herh zia thu tawiteVannunsiam
 
قواعد اللغة الانجليزية Grammar-.pdf
قواعد اللغة الانجليزية Grammar-.pdfقواعد اللغة الانجليزية Grammar-.pdf
قواعد اللغة الانجليزية Grammar-.pdfMohamed Alashram
 

Similar to Grammar rules of Madeenah book1 (20)

Magic method of fill in the blanks by tanbircox
Magic method of fill in the blanks by tanbircoxMagic method of fill in the blanks by tanbircox
Magic method of fill in the blanks by tanbircox
 
Magic method of fill in the blanks
Magic method of fill in the blanksMagic method of fill in the blanks
Magic method of fill in the blanks
 
Articles presentation
Articles presentationArticles presentation
Articles presentation
 
80% of Qur'anic Words (Classified word lists for easy memorization)
80% of Qur'anic Words (Classified word lists for easy memorization)80% of Qur'anic Words (Classified word lists for easy memorization)
80% of Qur'anic Words (Classified word lists for easy memorization)
 
Question 2b: Language
Question 2b: LanguageQuestion 2b: Language
Question 2b: Language
 
Professor Michael Hoey: The hidden similarities across languages - some good ...
Professor Michael Hoey: The hidden similarities across languages - some good ...Professor Michael Hoey: The hidden similarities across languages - some good ...
Professor Michael Hoey: The hidden similarities across languages - some good ...
 
Mizo - The Precious Blood of Jesus Christ.pdf
Mizo - The Precious Blood of Jesus Christ.pdfMizo - The Precious Blood of Jesus Christ.pdf
Mizo - The Precious Blood of Jesus Christ.pdf
 
English grammar part 3{mob}(bcs,job,university exam)
English grammar part 3{mob}(bcs,job,university exam)English grammar part 3{mob}(bcs,job,university exam)
English grammar part 3{mob}(bcs,job,university exam)
 
Dictionary tutorial
Dictionary tutorialDictionary tutorial
Dictionary tutorial
 
Lesson 19 | Use of Words on Scale أفعل | Learn Arabic to Understand the Qura...
Lesson 19 | Use of Words on Scale أفعل  | Learn Arabic to Understand the Qura...Lesson 19 | Use of Words on Scale أفعل  | Learn Arabic to Understand the Qura...
Lesson 19 | Use of Words on Scale أفعل | Learn Arabic to Understand the Qura...
 
Proagree
ProagreeProagree
Proagree
 
Learn qur'an terminology worksheet
Learn qur'an terminology worksheetLearn qur'an terminology worksheet
Learn qur'an terminology worksheet
 
language skills editing updated
language skills editing updatedlanguage skills editing updated
language skills editing updated
 
En childrens course_02
En childrens course_02En childrens course_02
En childrens course_02
 
En childrens course_02
En childrens course_02En childrens course_02
En childrens course_02
 
Bawm lei hen thumal pehtlaitir a herh zia thu tawite
Bawm lei hen thumal pehtlaitir a herh zia thu tawiteBawm lei hen thumal pehtlaitir a herh zia thu tawite
Bawm lei hen thumal pehtlaitir a herh zia thu tawite
 
Cloze test with & without clues by tanbircox
Cloze test with & without clues by tanbircoxCloze test with & without clues by tanbircox
Cloze test with & without clues by tanbircox
 
Parts of speech by tanbircox
Parts of speech by tanbircoxParts of speech by tanbircox
Parts of speech by tanbircox
 
قواعد اللغة الانجليزية Grammar-.pdf
قواعد اللغة الانجليزية Grammar-.pdfقواعد اللغة الانجليزية Grammar-.pdf
قواعد اللغة الانجليزية Grammar-.pdf
 
Sheets of Paper Shapes
Sheets of Paper ShapesSheets of Paper Shapes
Sheets of Paper Shapes
 

More from Sonali Jannat

nahw al_wadhiah_primary
nahw al_wadhiah_primarynahw al_wadhiah_primary
nahw al_wadhiah_primarySonali Jannat
 
lme din_orjoner_poddhoti
lme din_orjoner_poddhotilme din_orjoner_poddhoti
lme din_orjoner_poddhotiSonali Jannat
 
talimut tawhid_lil_atfal
 talimut tawhid_lil_atfal talimut tawhid_lil_atfal
talimut tawhid_lil_atfalSonali Jannat
 
hayez o_nefas-er_60_ti_prosno
hayez o_nefas-er_60_ti_prosnohayez o_nefas-er_60_ti_prosno
hayez o_nefas-er_60_ti_prosnoSonali Jannat
 
Noorani qaida english
Noorani qaida englishNoorani qaida english
Noorani qaida englishSonali Jannat
 
Madinah-book-3-notes-v8
Madinah-book-3-notes-v8Madinah-book-3-notes-v8
Madinah-book-3-notes-v8Sonali Jannat
 
Madinah-book-2-notes-v7
Madinah-book-2-notes-v7Madinah-book-2-notes-v7
Madinah-book-2-notes-v7Sonali Jannat
 
Madinah-book-1-notes
Madinah-book-1-notesMadinah-book-1-notes
Madinah-book-1-notesSonali Jannat
 
Articulation points-of-the-letters- makhraj
Articulation points-of-the-letters- makhrajArticulation points-of-the-letters- makhraj
Articulation points-of-the-letters- makhrajSonali Jannat
 
Reach The Goal via Tajweed Rules
Reach The Goal via Tajweed RulesReach The Goal via Tajweed Rules
Reach The Goal via Tajweed RulesSonali Jannat
 
Ammapara with Tajweed
Ammapara with TajweedAmmapara with Tajweed
Ammapara with TajweedSonali Jannat
 
Ak shobde quran shikha
Ak shobde quran shikhaAk shobde quran shikha
Ak shobde quran shikhaSonali Jannat
 
Step by-step-hazz-guide
Step by-step-hazz-guideStep by-step-hazz-guide
Step by-step-hazz-guideSonali Jannat
 
Arabic phonotice kerboard
Arabic phonotice kerboardArabic phonotice kerboard
Arabic phonotice kerboardSonali Jannat
 

More from Sonali Jannat (20)

nahw al_wadhiah_primary
nahw al_wadhiah_primarynahw al_wadhiah_primary
nahw al_wadhiah_primary
 
lme din_orjoner_poddhoti
lme din_orjoner_poddhotilme din_orjoner_poddhoti
lme din_orjoner_poddhoti
 
Eehyaus sunan
Eehyaus sunanEehyaus sunan
Eehyaus sunan
 
talimut tawhid_lil_atfal
 talimut tawhid_lil_atfal talimut tawhid_lil_atfal
talimut tawhid_lil_atfal
 
hayez o_nefas-er_60_ti_prosno
hayez o_nefas-er_60_ti_prosnohayez o_nefas-er_60_ti_prosno
hayez o_nefas-er_60_ti_prosno
 
Noorani qaida
Noorani qaidaNoorani qaida
Noorani qaida
 
Noorani qaida english
Noorani qaida englishNoorani qaida english
Noorani qaida english
 
Madinah-book-3-notes-v8
Madinah-book-3-notes-v8Madinah-book-3-notes-v8
Madinah-book-3-notes-v8
 
Madinah-book-2-notes-v7
Madinah-book-2-notes-v7Madinah-book-2-notes-v7
Madinah-book-2-notes-v7
 
Madinah-book-1-notes
Madinah-book-1-notesMadinah-book-1-notes
Madinah-book-1-notes
 
Articulation points-of-the-letters- makhraj
Articulation points-of-the-letters- makhrajArticulation points-of-the-letters- makhraj
Articulation points-of-the-letters- makhraj
 
Madani quida
Madani quidaMadani quida
Madani quida
 
Reach The Goal via Tajweed Rules
Reach The Goal via Tajweed RulesReach The Goal via Tajweed Rules
Reach The Goal via Tajweed Rules
 
Ammapara with Tajweed
Ammapara with TajweedAmmapara with Tajweed
Ammapara with Tajweed
 
Ak shobde quran shikha
Ak shobde quran shikhaAk shobde quran shikha
Ak shobde quran shikha
 
Quranic dua
Quranic duaQuranic dua
Quranic dua
 
Sarf
Sarf Sarf
Sarf
 
Littilmidz 3
Littilmidz 3Littilmidz 3
Littilmidz 3
 
Step by-step-hazz-guide
Step by-step-hazz-guideStep by-step-hazz-guide
Step by-step-hazz-guide
 
Arabic phonotice kerboard
Arabic phonotice kerboardArabic phonotice kerboard
Arabic phonotice kerboard
 

Recently uploaded

IGNOU MSCCFT and PGDCFT Exam Question Pattern: MCFT003 Counselling and Family...
IGNOU MSCCFT and PGDCFT Exam Question Pattern: MCFT003 Counselling and Family...IGNOU MSCCFT and PGDCFT Exam Question Pattern: MCFT003 Counselling and Family...
IGNOU MSCCFT and PGDCFT Exam Question Pattern: MCFT003 Counselling and Family...PsychoTech Services
 
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy ReformA Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy ReformChameera Dedduwage
 
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activityParis 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activityGeoBlogs
 
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in DelhiRussian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhikauryashika82
 
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across SectorsAPM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across SectorsAssociation for Project Management
 
Unit-IV- Pharma. Marketing Channels.pptx
Unit-IV- Pharma. Marketing Channels.pptxUnit-IV- Pharma. Marketing Channels.pptx
Unit-IV- Pharma. Marketing Channels.pptxVishalSingh1417
 
Introduction to Nonprofit Accounting: The Basics
Introduction to Nonprofit Accounting: The BasicsIntroduction to Nonprofit Accounting: The Basics
Introduction to Nonprofit Accounting: The BasicsTechSoup
 
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...christianmathematics
 
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi 6.pdf
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi  6.pdf1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi  6.pdf
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi 6.pdfQucHHunhnh
 
Measures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median and Mode
Measures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median and ModeMeasures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median and Mode
Measures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median and ModeThiyagu K
 
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdfArihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdfchloefrazer622
 
Key note speaker Neum_Admir Softic_ENG.pdf
Key note speaker Neum_Admir Softic_ENG.pdfKey note speaker Neum_Admir Softic_ENG.pdf
Key note speaker Neum_Admir Softic_ENG.pdfAdmir Softic
 
Activity 01 - Artificial Culture (1).pdf
Activity 01 - Artificial Culture (1).pdfActivity 01 - Artificial Culture (1).pdf
Activity 01 - Artificial Culture (1).pdfciinovamais
 
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptxSOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptxiammrhaywood
 
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...fonyou31
 
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdfClass 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdfAyushMahapatra5
 
Advanced Views - Calendar View in Odoo 17
Advanced Views - Calendar View in Odoo 17Advanced Views - Calendar View in Odoo 17
Advanced Views - Calendar View in Odoo 17Celine George
 
Disha NEET Physics Guide for classes 11 and 12.pdf
Disha NEET Physics Guide for classes 11 and 12.pdfDisha NEET Physics Guide for classes 11 and 12.pdf
Disha NEET Physics Guide for classes 11 and 12.pdfchloefrazer622
 

Recently uploaded (20)

IGNOU MSCCFT and PGDCFT Exam Question Pattern: MCFT003 Counselling and Family...
IGNOU MSCCFT and PGDCFT Exam Question Pattern: MCFT003 Counselling and Family...IGNOU MSCCFT and PGDCFT Exam Question Pattern: MCFT003 Counselling and Family...
IGNOU MSCCFT and PGDCFT Exam Question Pattern: MCFT003 Counselling and Family...
 
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy ReformA Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
 
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activityParis 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
 
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in DelhiRussian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
 
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across SectorsAPM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
 
Unit-IV- Pharma. Marketing Channels.pptx
Unit-IV- Pharma. Marketing Channels.pptxUnit-IV- Pharma. Marketing Channels.pptx
Unit-IV- Pharma. Marketing Channels.pptx
 
Introduction to Nonprofit Accounting: The Basics
Introduction to Nonprofit Accounting: The BasicsIntroduction to Nonprofit Accounting: The Basics
Introduction to Nonprofit Accounting: The Basics
 
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
 
INDIA QUIZ 2024 RLAC DELHI UNIVERSITY.pptx
INDIA QUIZ 2024 RLAC DELHI UNIVERSITY.pptxINDIA QUIZ 2024 RLAC DELHI UNIVERSITY.pptx
INDIA QUIZ 2024 RLAC DELHI UNIVERSITY.pptx
 
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi 6.pdf
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi  6.pdf1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi  6.pdf
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi 6.pdf
 
Measures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median and Mode
Measures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median and ModeMeasures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median and Mode
Measures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median and Mode
 
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdfArihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
 
Key note speaker Neum_Admir Softic_ENG.pdf
Key note speaker Neum_Admir Softic_ENG.pdfKey note speaker Neum_Admir Softic_ENG.pdf
Key note speaker Neum_Admir Softic_ENG.pdf
 
Activity 01 - Artificial Culture (1).pdf
Activity 01 - Artificial Culture (1).pdfActivity 01 - Artificial Culture (1).pdf
Activity 01 - Artificial Culture (1).pdf
 
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptxSOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
 
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
 
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdfClass 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
 
Advance Mobile Application Development class 07
Advance Mobile Application Development class 07Advance Mobile Application Development class 07
Advance Mobile Application Development class 07
 
Advanced Views - Calendar View in Odoo 17
Advanced Views - Calendar View in Odoo 17Advanced Views - Calendar View in Odoo 17
Advanced Views - Calendar View in Odoo 17
 
Disha NEET Physics Guide for classes 11 and 12.pdf
Disha NEET Physics Guide for classes 11 and 12.pdfDisha NEET Physics Guide for classes 11 and 12.pdf
Disha NEET Physics Guide for classes 11 and 12.pdf
 

Grammar rules of Madeenah book1

  • 1. ‫م‬ِِ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ح‬ِِ ‫ر‬َّ ‫نا ال‬ِِ ‫حـمـ‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ر‬َّ ‫للا ال‬ّ‫ِه‬ ‫ما ا‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ب‬ِِ Arabic Grammar Rules for Madeenah Book One The ‫ا‬three ‫ا‬vowel ‫ا‬markings ‫ا‬ُ‫ث ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ثثال‬َّ‫تا ال‬ُ ‫كتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ةا ا‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬kasrah ‫ا -ا ا ا ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬ ‫ -ا ا‬ُ ‫ا ا ا ا ا‬ٌ ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬َّ ‫ض‬َ‫ ة‬hdhamma ‫ا ا ا ا‬ٌ ‫ ة‬‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬fathah ‫ا -ا ا ا ا ا‬َ‫ا ا ة‬ )i( (u) (a) Sukoon ‫ا‬ْ‫ -ا ِم‬ ‫ن‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ك‬ُ ‫س‬ُ shaddah ‫ا‬ - ّ ‫ا ا ا ا‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ة‬ٌ ‫د‬َّ‫ش‬َ‫ ة‬ :a‫ن‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫و‬ِِ ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َّ‫ال‬at- tanween ‫ -ا ا ا‬ً ‫نا ا ا ا ا‬ِِ ‫تا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬fathataan ‫ا‬- (an( ‫ا -ا ا ا ا‬ٌ ‫ن‬ِِ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬َّ ‫ض‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬dhammataan- ‫ا‬(un( ‫نا -ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ِِ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬kasrataan ‫ٍا ا ا‬- ‫ا ا ا‬(in( When ‫ا‬vowel ‫ا‬markings ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬doubled ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬end ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬word ‫ا‬they ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬called ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫و‬ِِ ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫(ا‬tanween). ‫ا ا‬The ‫ا‬additional ‫ا‬vowel ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬end ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬word ‫ا‬represents ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫(ا‬noon ‫ا‬saakinah). ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬The ‫ا‬‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬written ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬only ‫ا‬pronounced. ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬e.g. ‫ا‬ ‫د‬ُ‫ج‬ِِ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا ا‬ٌ - ‫ا‬‫جد‬ِِ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ The ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬language ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬made ‫ا‬up ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬‫ت‬ٌ ‫ـمتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا ا‬ ‫(ا ا‬words) ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬these ‫ا‬words ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬ of ‫ا‬three ‫ا‬types ‫ا‬they ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬known ‫ا‬as:a - ‫فا‬ٌ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬Particle/Letter - ‫لا ا‬ٌ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ف‬ِِAction/Verb - ‫ما ا‬ٌ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬Noun ‫ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ ‫ت -ا‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬house ‫ب -ا ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬went,/to ‫ا‬go ‫إلى -ا‬ِِto 1
  • 2. ‫ت‬ٍ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫لىا‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫:ا ا‬a ‫ا‬ُ‫ل ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬He ‫ا‬went ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬house ‫:ا‬aceSenten The ‫ا‬table ‫ا‬below ‫ا‬shows ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬properties ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬‫م‬ٌ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬ ‫(ا‬noun):a Examples Translation Properties ‫ا ا ا‬ٌ ‫ ة‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب ،ا‬ٌ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ Masculine, ‫ا‬feminine ‫ث‬ٌ ‫ن‬َّ‫ؤ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ ‫ر ،ا‬ٌ ‫ك‬َّ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ ، ‫ن‬ِِ ‫بـــــتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب ،ا‬ٌ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫طـــــ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ثال‬َّ ‫ط‬ُ Singular, ‫ا‬dual, ‫ا‬plural ‫ع‬ٌ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫نى ،ا‬َّ‫ث‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ ‫د ،ا‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫م‬ُ ‫ت‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب ،ا‬ٌ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ Intellect, ‫ا‬non- intellect ‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫را‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل ،ا‬ٌ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب‬ُ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َّ ‫ب ،ا ال‬ٌ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ Indefinite, ‫ا‬definite ‫ا‬ٌ ‫ ة‬‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ة ،ا‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِِ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ة‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِِ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا ا‬is ‫ا‬when ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬indefinite ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬specific, ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬general ‫ا‬i.e., ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ ism ‫ا‬‫ب‬ٌ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ِِ ‫ا‬‘a ‫ا‬book’ ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬any ‫ا‬book ‫ا‬from ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬different ‫ا‬types ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬ books. ‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ ٌا‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬when ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬definite ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬specific, ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬general ‫ا‬i.e., ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ ism ‫ا‬‫ب‬ُ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ِِ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ا‬‘the ‫ا‬book’ ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬‫د‬ٍ‫ـم‬َّ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ ‫با‬ُ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ِِ ‫ا‬‘Muhammad’s ‫ا‬book’, ‫ا‬here ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ book ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬particular ‫ا‬book ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬just ‫ا‬any ‫ا‬book ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬general. An ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬language ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬‫نى‬َّ‫ث‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ ‫(ا‬dual) ‫ا‬meaning ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬shows ‫ا‬upon ‫ا‬ two ‫ا‬i.e., ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬‫ن‬ِِ ‫بتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬means ‫‘ا‬two ‫ا‬students’ ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬done ‫ا‬by ‫ا‬adding ‫ا‬‫ن‬ِِ ‫ا‬ (alif ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬noon)at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬end ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism. An ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٌ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬intellect ‫ا‬such ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬humans, ‫ا‬angels ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬jinns ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬ it ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬no ‫ا‬intellect ‫ا‬such ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬animals, ‫ا‬objects, ‫ا‬trees ‫ا‬ e.t.c. The ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٌ ‫ص‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬(Asl) ‫ا‬ origin ‫ا‬ of ‫ا‬ an ‫ا‬ ism ‫ا‬ is ‫ا‬ that ‫ا‬ it ‫ا‬ carries ‫ا‬‫ن‬ِِ ‫تتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬َّ ‫ـ‬‫ـ‬‫ض‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ ٌا‬- ‫ا‬‘two ‫ا‬ dhammas’ ‫ا‬ (tanween) ‫ا‬ on ‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬ last ‫ا‬ letter ‫ا‬ of ‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬ word. ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬ The ‫ا‬ tanween ‫ا‬ generally ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬also ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬sign ‫ا‬showing ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬‫ة‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِِ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫(ا‬indefinite), ‫ا‬however ‫ا‬ there ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬exception ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬because ‫ا‬you ‫ا‬will ‫ا‬find ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬male ‫ا‬names ‫ا‬ such ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬‫س‬ٌ ‫بتا‬َّ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ، ‫د‬ٌ ‫ـم‬َّ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ ‫ا‬accept ‫ا‬tanween ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬they ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ ٌا‬ ‫(ا‬definite). The ‫ا‬tanween ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬indefinite ‫ا‬article ‫ا‬corresponding ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬English ‫ا‬ ‘a’/ ‫‘ا‬an’. 2
  • 3. ) ‫لا ا‬ُ ‫و‬َّ ‫أل‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫سا ا ا‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ال‬١( ‫ذا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ِمْا ا ا‬This ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬house - ‫تا‬ْ‫هِم‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬ِِ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َّ‫لل‬ِِ ‫ا‬ ‫فا‬ٌ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬Letter ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬bring ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬attention ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬alert ‫ه‬ِِ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َّ‫لل‬ِِ ‫فا‬ٌ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬letter ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬alert ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬bring ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬attention ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ person ‫ا‬who ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬being ‫ا‬addressed ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬mostly ‫ا‬connected ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬‫ء‬ُ ‫ـمتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ا‬ ‫(ا‬nouns ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication). ‫ةا ا ا‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬- ‫ا‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication ‫ا‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬pronounced ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬‫ذا‬َ‫ ة‬‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ , ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬written ‫ا‬without ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬first ‫ا‬alif. The ‫ا‬‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬point ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬indicate ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬people, ‫ا‬animals, ‫ا‬objects ‫ا‬ things ‫ا‬which ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬felt ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬touched ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬also ‫ا‬indicate ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬things ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬ have ‫ا‬meaning ‫ا‬such ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬‫ي‬ٌ ‫أ‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬‘opinion’ ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬‫م‬ٌ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ع‬ِِ ‫‘ا‬knowledge’. ‫عا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ٌ ‫ف‬ِِ‫نتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ما‬ٌ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ع‬ِِ ‫اا‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬This ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬beneficial ‫ا‬knowledge The ‫ا‬table ‫ا‬below ‫ا‬shows ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬properties ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬‫ا‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ) ‫ةا‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ) Indicates,points to ‫لى‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫ة‬ُ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬near ‫ب‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ The ‫ا‬masculine ‫ر‬ُ ‫ك‬َّ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬singular ‫د‬ُ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ The ‫ا‬‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ ٌا‬ ‫ا‬(definite). 3
  • 4. It ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬indicate ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬point ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬those ‫ا‬possessing ‫ا‬intellect ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٌ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬ things ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬do ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬intellect ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬ . ‫متا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ما ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ٌ ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إ‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫م‬ٌ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬- Interrogative ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬Questioning ‫ا‬Noun The ‫ا‬Interrogative ‫ا‬Noun ‫ا‬‘‫متا‬َ‫ ة‬ ’ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬ask ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬about ‫ا‬something ‫ا‬ that ‫ا‬does ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬intellect ‫ا‬‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬ and ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬always ‫ا‬comes ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ beginning ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬sentence. ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬When ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬word ‫ا‬comes ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬beginning ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬ sentence ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬called ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬‫ل ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬‫ر‬ُ ‫د‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ص‬َ‫ ة‬ِِ . ‫متا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا ؟ا ا ا ا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬What ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬this? ‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ةا ا‬ُ‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ما ،ا‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫فا ا‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ - Particle/Letter ‫ا‬ of ‫ا‬ interrogation ‫ا‬ or ‫ا‬ questioning ‫ا‬ or ‫ا‬ also ‫ا‬ known ‫ا‬ as ‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬ Interrogative ‫ا‬Hamzah. The ‫ا‬‫م‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ةا ا‬ُ‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬comes ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬beginning ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬sentence ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬do ‫ا‬all ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ nouns ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬particles ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬questioning. ‫ا ا‬It ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬ask ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬about ‫ا‬ those ‫ا‬ possessing ‫ا‬ intellect ‫ا‬ as ‫ا‬ well ‫ا‬ as ‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬ things ‫ا‬ that ‫ا‬ do ‫ا‬ not ‫ا‬ possess ‫ا‬ intellect. ‫أا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت؟‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬Is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬house? ‫د؟‬ٌ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫أا‬َ‫ ة‬Is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬boy? ‫ب‬ٍ ‫وا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫فا‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ - ‫م‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬Letter ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬answer ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬reply ‫ي‬ٍ ‫ف‬ِِ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫وا‬ِِ ‫با‬ٍ ‫وا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫فا‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل -ا‬Letter/particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬answer ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬negation The ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬reply ‫ا‬‫م‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬reply ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬affirmation ‫ا‬ whereas ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬‫ا ل‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬reply ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬negation. ‫م؟‬ٌ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫أا‬َ‫ ة‬Is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬pen? ‫م.ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ٌ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ، ‫م‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬Yes ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬pen 4
  • 5. ‫ص؟‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ـم‬ِِ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫أا‬َ‫ ة‬Is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬shirt? ‫م؟‬ٌ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ، ‫ل‬No, ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬pen. ‫ما ا ا ا ا ا ا‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬– ‫نا‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬Noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬interrogation/questioning This ‫ا‬interrogative ‫ا‬noun ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬ask ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬question ‫ا‬about ‫ا‬those ‫ا‬who ‫ا‬possess ‫ا‬ intellect ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ق‬ِِ‫عتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل؟‬ُ ‫ج‬ُ ‫ر‬َّ ‫ذاال‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫نا‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬Who ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬this ‫ا‬man? ‫؟‬‫م‬ِِ‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬ِِ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ا ا ا‬ُ‫م ة‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ثال‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ -ا‬Question ‫ا‬mark 5
  • 6. )٢‫ني‬ِِ‫ثتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫سا ال‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫د‬َّ‫(ا ال‬ ‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ- ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬Noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication/pointing ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫تا‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫هذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫د‬ٌ ‫ج‬ِِ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬This ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬house ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬mosque ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬indicate/point ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬objects ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬people ‫ا‬ that ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬distant ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬far. ‫ا ا‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬can ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬broken ‫ا‬down ‫ا‬into ‫ا‬three ‫ا‬parts:a ‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إلشتا‬ِِ ‫ما ا‬ُ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ِِ ‫ا‬- ‫ذا‬َ‫ ة‬Noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication ‫د‬ِِ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ل‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫م‬ُ‫الثال‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬– ‫لا‬ِِThe ‫ا‬laam ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬for ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬far/distant ‫ب‬ٌ ‫طتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خ‬ِِ ‫فا‬ٌ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك -ا‬َ‫ ة‬Particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬address Some ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬grammarians ‫ا‬say ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬‘‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ’ ‫ا‬ particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬address ‫ا‬also ‫ا‬ indicates ‫ا‬ upon ‫ا‬ far/distant ‫ا‬ and ‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬‘‫ل‬ِِ ’ ‫ا‬ shows ‫ا‬ upon ‫ا‬ even ‫ا‬ more ‫ا‬ or ‫ا‬ increased ‫ا‬furtherness/distance. The ‫ا‬letter/particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬address ‫ا‬‘‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ’ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬used ‫ا‬if ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬person ‫ا ا‬or ‫ا‬objectwe ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬ addressing ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬masculine. The ‫ا‬table ‫ا‬below ‫ا‬shows ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬properties ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬:a Indicates,points to ‫لى‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫ة‬ُ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ا‬ The ‫ا‬far/distant ‫د‬ُ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ع‬ِِ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ The ‫ا‬masculine ‫ر‬ُ ‫ك‬َّ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬singular ‫د‬ُ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ All ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ءا ا‬ُ ‫ـمتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬nouns ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication ‫ا‬are ‫ا‬‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ ٌا‬ ‫ا‬definite. ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬pronounced ‫ا‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ا‬‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬written ‫ا‬without ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬alif. 6
  • 7. Some ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬grammarians ‫ا‬say ‫ا‬that ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬‫ة‬ِِ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫شتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫إل‬ِِ ‫ءا ا‬ُ ‫ـمتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬have ‫ا‬three ‫ا‬levels ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬ِِ‫را‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ثا‬ُ ‫:ا ثثال‬a ‫ب‬ِِ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫لل‬ِِ ‫ا‬– ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬For ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬near/close ‫د‬ِِ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ع‬ِِ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ل‬ِِ ‫ا‬- ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬For ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬far/distant ‫ط‬ِِ ‫س‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ل‬ِِ ‫ا‬- ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذا‬َ‫ ة‬For ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬middle ‫ا‬between ‫ا‬near ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬far ‫د‬ِِ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ما‬ُ‫ول‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ها‬ِِ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ن‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫لل‬ِِ ‫ا‬‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫عا‬ُ ‫ـم‬ِِِِ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ج‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫لا‬ The ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬alert/bringing ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬attention ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬laam ‫ا‬indicating ‫ا‬upon ‫ا‬ the ‫ا‬distant ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬far ‫ا‬will ‫ا‬never ‫ا‬come ‫ا‬together ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬noun ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬indication ‫ا‬i.e; ‫ا‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ِِ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫هتا‬َ‫ ة‬ - this ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬wrong ‫ا‬‘‫ط أ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ ٌا‬’. 7
  • 8. )٣‫ث‬ُ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ث‬َ‫ ة‬‫سا ال‬ُ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫د‬َّ‫(ا ال‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫فا‬ٌ ‫ر‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل -ا‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬)al) ‫ا‬Definite ‫ا‬Particle The ‫ا‬definite ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬prefixed ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬which ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬‫ة‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِِ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫(ا‬indefinite) ‫ا‬ and ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬causes ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬become ‫ا‬‫ف ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِِ ‫ع‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ ٌا‬ ‫ا‬ (definite), ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬also ‫ا‬causes ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ tanween ‫ا‬at ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬end ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬be ‫ا‬dropped. ‫ا ا‬The ‫ا‬definite ‫ا‬particle ‫(ا‬al) ‫ا‬corresponds ‫ا‬ to ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬English ‫‘ا‬the’. ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬This ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬doctor. ‫ا‬‫س‬ٌ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫با‬ُ ‫ي‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ب‬ِِ‫ط‬َّ ‫ل‬The ‫ا‬doctor ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬sitting. The ‫ا‬Arabic ‫ا‬alphabet ‫ا‬consists ‫ا‬of ‫ا 82ا‬letters. ‫ا ا‬Of ‫ا‬these ‫ا 41ا‬are ‫ا‬called ‫ا‬Solar ‫ا‬ Letters ‫ا‬‫ي ة‬َّ‫س‬ِِ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ش‬َّ ‫ال‬ ‫فا‬ُ ‫و‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ح‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ُا‬, ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬other ‫ا 41ا‬are ‫ا‬called ‫ا‬Lunar ‫ا‬Letters ‫ا‬ ‫ي ة‬َّ‫ر‬ِِ ‫ـم‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫فا‬ُ ‫و‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ ‫ح‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ُا‬. In ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬articulation ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬Solar ‫ا‬Letters ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬tip ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬blade ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬tongue ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬ involved ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬pronunciation. ‫ا ا‬The ‫ا‬tip ‫ا‬or ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬blade ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬tongue ‫ا‬does ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬ play ‫ا‬any ‫ا‬part ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬articulation ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬Lunar ‫ا‬Letters, ‫(ا‬refer ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬lesson ‫ا ,3ا‬ pg.19 ‫ا‬Madinah ‫ا‬bk.1). When ‫ا‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬prefixed ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬beginning ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬Solar ‫ا‬Letter ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬laam ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬ ‘al’ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬pronounced ‫ا‬but ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬written, ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬first ‫ا‬letter ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬takes ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬ shaddah ‫ا‬–ّ . ‫ا ا‬For ‫ا‬example, ‫ا‬‫س‬ُ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ش‬َّ ‫ال‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬ ‫(ا ا‬ash- shamsu). When ‫ا‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬prefixed ‫ا‬to ‫ا‬an ‫ا‬ism ‫ا‬beginning ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬Lunar ‫ا‬Letter ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬laam ‫ا‬of ‫ا‬ ‘al’ ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬pronounced ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬written. ‫ا ا‬For ‫ا‬example, ‫ا‬‫ر‬ُ ‫ـم‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬ ‫(ا‬al- qamaru). In ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬definite ‫ا‬particle ‫ا‬‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬(al) ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬‫ا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬(a) ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬known ‫ا‬as ‫ا‬‫ل‬ِِ ‫ص‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬ ‫ةا‬ُ‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ـم‬ْ‫ِم‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ Connecting ‫ا‬ Hamzah. ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬ If ‫ا‬ it ‫ا‬ is ‫ا‬not ‫ا‬ preceded ‫ا‬ by ‫ا‬ a ‫ا‬ word ‫ا‬ it ‫ا‬ will ‫ا‬ be ‫ا‬ pronounced ‫ا‬with ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬vowel ‫ا‬marking ‫ ةَا‬- ‫ا‬ (fathah). ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬If ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬preceded ‫ا‬by ‫ا‬a ‫ا‬ word ‫ا‬it ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬dropped ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬pronunciation, ‫ا‬though ‫ا‬remains ‫ا‬in ‫ا‬writing. ‫س‬ٌ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫با‬ُ ‫ل‬ِِ‫تا‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬َّ‫ا‬ ‫:ا‬a‫ل‬ٌ ‫ثتا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ِِ‫س‬ُ ‫ر‬ّ‫ِه‬ ‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ـم‬ُ ‫ل‬ْ‫ِم‬‫ا‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬ ‫فا‬ٌ ‫ق‬ِِ‫وا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ا‬The ‫ا‬student ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬sitting ‫ا‬and ‫ا‬the ‫ا‬ teacher ‫ا‬is ‫ا‬standing, ‫(ا‬wa l-mudarrisu…). 8
  • 9. ‫يُ ة‬َّ‫ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬ُ‫لُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫ا‬is a beneficial sentence (‫ة‬ٌ(,‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ٌ(,‫ُ ة‬‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ‫ا‬ ), and it is made up of 2 parts known as ‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫د أا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬َ‫ ة‬(al-mubtada wa l-khabar). ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ (1) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is from the Arabic word ‫ء‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫دلا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ meaning the beginning or starting, and from its origin is that it comes at the beginning of the sentence. (2) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is an ism that is the subject of talk or discussion. (3) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫تتت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫فتت‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter of the ism. (4) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ in its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ص‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ أ‬ (origin) precedes ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ (the khabar). (5) ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ in its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ص‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ أ‬ (origin) is ‫فُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ٌ(,(definite). ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ (1) ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is that which comes after ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ in its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ص‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ أ‬ (origin). (2) ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ gives information or news about ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬, and by which it completes a benefit with ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬. 9 ُ‫يُ ةا‬َّ‫ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬ ُ‫لُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ُ‫ا‬
  • 10. (3) ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ in its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ص‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ أ‬ (origin) is ‫ة‬ٌ(,‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ك‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ (indefinite). (4) ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫بتت‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫فتت‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter of the ism. ‫يُ ة‬َّ‫ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬ُ‫لُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ج‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ٌ(, ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ج‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬The mosque is near. ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ 10
  • 11. )٤(‫ع‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ّي‬‫رلا‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫س‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬)1 ) is a Letter/Particle that enters upon an ism only. (2) ‫ر‬ِّ ‫جت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ changes the state of the ism to ‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫جت‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (majroor), meaning the ism takes kasrah/kasrataan on the last letter. (3) ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ can have many meanings and its meaning is not known or complete until it enters upon a sentence. Then its exact meaning is known from the context of the sentence. ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫د‬ٌ(,‫م‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬Muhammad is in the house ‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫كنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫م‬ٌ(,‫هنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫م‬ٌ(,‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ِ‫ّي‬ – ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Noun of Questioning for Place 11 ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬-Particle of Jarr ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬From- ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬On/Above- -‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬In
  • 12. ‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫كنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫م‬ٌ(,‫هنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫م‬ٌ(,‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ِ‫ّي‬ is an ism which is used to ask a question about the whereabouts of someone/something. ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬‫ب ؟‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫تنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬Where is the book? ‫ب ؟‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬It is on the desk/table? ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬-Detached Pronoun (1) ‫صل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬ is a type of ism that is used to indicate upon the ‫ب‬ٌ(, ‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫غنا‬َ‫ ة‬ (Absent), or the ‫ب‬ٌ(, ‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ (Addressed), or the ‫م‬ٌ(,‫ل‬ِّ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ (Speaker). (2) ‫صل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬ you can begin a sentence with it. (3) ‫صل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬ is a type of a ‫د أ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ (4) ‫صل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ُ‫ا‬ is ‫فُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ٌ(,(definite). 5) The dhameer ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ and ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬ can be used for those who possess intellect and things that do not possess intellect. If they are used for the latter they will have the meaning ‘it’. 12 ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ -‫ننا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ أ‬I -‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬You ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬-It/She -‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬He/It-‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬You
  • 13. ‫ ؟‬ُ‫شُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫عنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Where is ‘Aaisha? ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ُ ة‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫غ‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬She is in the room ‫ ؟‬ُ‫عُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫سنا‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Where is the watch? ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬It is on the bed The table below shows the properties of ‫لُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ُ‫ا‬(the Detached Pronouns): ‫د‬ٌ(,‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ Number ‫س‬ٌ(, ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ج‬ِ‫ّي‬ Gender ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ُّ ‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ Indicates upon ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ ة‬‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ Detached Pronoun ‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ )1( ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ك‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ Male - ‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫غنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Absent -‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬It/He ‫ة‬ُ‫ا‬‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ )1( ‫ث‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ة‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ Female - ُ‫بُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ء‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫غنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Absent -‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ّي‬She/It ‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ )1( ‫كر‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ Male - ‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Addressed -‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬You ‫ة‬ُ‫ا‬‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ )1( ‫ث‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ة‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ Female -ُ‫بُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Addressed -‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬You ‫د‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ )1( ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ك‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ة‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ث‬ُ‫ا‬ - ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬‫ل‬ِّ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬The Speaker - ‫ننا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ أ‬I/Me 13
  • 14. ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ص‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ن‬ُ‫ا‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (Prevented from Tanween) is a Term that is used for a particular group of nouns which do not accept tanween and when they are in a state of ‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (kasra) they take Fathah. This particular group of nouns further divides up into many categories and from them is the category known in the Arabic language as: ‫ف‬ٍ ‫ل‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ أ‬ ‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫غ‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ث‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬‫أ‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ت‬َّّ‫ة‬‫لال‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫يُ ةا‬َّ‫ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬Female Names Without Alif This category contains Female Names which do not accept tanween but there is a condition '‫ط‬ٌ(, ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ش‬َ‫ ة‬ ' for them not accepting tanween and that is, that the names are made up of more than 3 letters. This category of names is divided up into into 3 types with regards to their femininity. 14 ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ص‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ن‬ُ‫ا‬‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ة‬ُ‫ا‬‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫مُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ط‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬ -‫ث‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬‫تأ‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬Femininity ‫ي‬ٌّ) ‫ظ‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬)In)Wording- ‫ي‬ٌّ) ‫و‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬)In)Meaning- -‫ي‬ٌّ) ‫ظ‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ٌّ) ‫و‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (In)Meaning and Wording 9in wo ‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ،‫مز‬ُ‫ا‬‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ُ‫مُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ط‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬،‫ز‬ُ‫نُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫آ‬ُ‫حُ ةا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ط‬َ‫ ة‬ ،‫ةز‬ُ‫ا‬‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬
  • 15. The ‫ة‬‫طُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (Round Taa) is a letter that is added at the end of an ism and it signifies femininity of a word. The diagram above shows that there are 3 categories of femininity in female names without alif: 1) In wording and meaning - names which are feminine in their wording i.e. they end in taa marboota and in their meaning i.e. they are names which are used for females. 2) In meaning - names which are used for females but not feminine in wording. 3) In wording - names which are feminine in wording but not meaning, they are names which are used for males. The origin of nouns ending with the ‫ة‬‫طُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ (Round Taa) is only to distinguish the feminine from the masculine. And you will mostly find that with the ‫ت‬ٌ(, ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ص‬ِ‫ّي‬ (Adjectives) i.e. ‫مُ ة‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ /‫م‬ٌ(,‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ٌ(,(Generous, Noble). :‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬The Definition ‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ز‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ذ‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬َّ‫ة‬‫لا‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ز‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ث‬ٍ ‫د‬َ‫ ة‬‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫د‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ -‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ض‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫لال‬ .‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ُّ ‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬ The Past Verb-that which indicates upon an event/happening taking place in the time which is before the time of speaking/conversation. 15 -‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬The Verb/Action ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لال‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ع‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ضنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ض‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ The Past VerbThe Present VerbThe Command Verb -‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫ك‬َ‫ ة‬He Wrote-‫ب‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ا‬‫ك‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ي‬َ‫ ة‬He Writes-‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ا‬‫ك‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫لا‬ُ‫ا‬)you)Write!
  • 16. ‫س ؟‬ٌ(, ‫بنا‬َّ‫ة‬‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Where is Abbaas? ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫د‬ِ‫ّي‬‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫نا‬‫لاى‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِ‫ّي‬He went to the head teacher For every action we have a doer or the one who performs the action. In Arabic the doer of the action is called ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ (al-faa’il). :‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ر‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ة‬‫لال‬The Definition .‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫ب‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ق‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ك‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ذ‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ع‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫لا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ (the Doer) is an ism which is ‫ع‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ takes dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter and mentioned before it is its ‫ل‬ٌ(, ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬ verb. ‫ع‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ا‬‫ر‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫د‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ج‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ى‬O‫ل‬َ‫ ة‬‫إ‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫د‬ٌ(,‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫حنا‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬Haamid went to the mosque ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫و‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ض‬ٍ ‫منا‬َ‫ ة‬ You will find that ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is not always apparent after the verb ‫ب‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ذ‬َ‫ ة‬. That is because in the past-tense verbs for the Male Absent if ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬ is not apparent then the ‫ر‬ٌ(, ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َ‫ ة‬ (pronoun) '‫و‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ا‬ ' (He) will be ‫ل‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫فنا‬َ‫ ة‬‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬َ‫ ة‬. And this dhameer is known as ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ت‬َ‫ ة‬‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ض‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫لال‬َ‫ ة‬ (The Hidden Dhameer), you will not see it in writing or pronounce it even though it is there. ‫د ؟‬ٌ(,‫م‬َّ‫ة‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫يِم‬‫ أ‬Where is Muhammad? ‫د‬ِ‫ّي‬‫ج‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫يِم‬ ‫م‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫يِم‬‫لا‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ّي‬ ‫ج‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫ر‬َ‫ ة‬ ‫خ‬َ‫ ة‬He left from the mosque 16
  • 17. The four signs of an ism There are 4 signs by which an ism is known, and you will not find these signs entering upon the verbs or particles/letters, so they are specific to the nouns. These 4 signs can be used to distinguish between the ‫ء‬ٌ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬ (nouns) and the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫عءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫م‬‫أ‬ (verbs) and ‫ف‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ (particles). (1) The first sign is that the ism accepts ‫ن‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫و‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ (tanween). (2) The second sign is that ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ (alif and laam) can enter upon the ism. (3) The third sign is that ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ (particles of jarr) can enter upon the ism. (4) The fourth sign is that the ism can take ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ (kasrah/kasrataan) on the last letter. ‫ن‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫و‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ ‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ج‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫لف ى‬َّ‫ى‬‫ص‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫د‬ٌ ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬Muhammad prayed in the mosque ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬)kasrah( 17 )‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫عال‬َ‫ءا‬٤( -ٍ -ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ -ً –ٍ –ٌ ‫ن‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫و‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬
  • 18. )٥‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫خءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ ( ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬‫س‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ، ‫را‬ِّ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫س‬‫س‬‫تدق‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫سف ى‬‫س‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ال‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ ‫ب ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ : ُ‫ف ةْو‬َ‫ءا‬‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫مف ى‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫س‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫أل‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ا‬‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫مف ى‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫س‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ثءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬. ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ُ‫ْو‬(al-idhaafah) is a relationship between two nouns with a hidden particle of jarr, the first noun is called ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ (mudhaaf) and the second noun is called ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ (mudhaaf ilaih). .‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ص‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ص‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫خ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ُ‫ف ةْو‬َ‫ءا‬‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ذاا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ This Particular idhaafah gives benefit by giving ‫ف‬ٌ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ (to make definite) to the mudhaaf or ‫ص‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ص‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫خ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ (to narrow down/particularise). Meaning, if the ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ is ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ (definite) then the ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ will become ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ , if the ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ is ‫ة‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ (indefinite) then the ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ will be particularised or not so general but it will not be ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ (definite). ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ِّ ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ذا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬This is the teacher’s book ٌ ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ٌ ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ 18 ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬‫د‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬
  • 19. The Idhafaah construction has a ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ which is omitted/hidden. This ‫ر‬ّ g ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ gives meaning to the Idhaafah, there are 3 different ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ that an Idhaafah can have, (1) ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ (in), ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ (from/part of) and ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ) ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫)الال‬ (for/belonging to). At the moment we have only taken one meaning of the Idhaafah the ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫الال‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ) ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ) which has the meaning of, for/belonging to/possession. So when we say ‫د‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ it literally means, ‘the book belongs to Muhammad or Muhammad’s book (‫د‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬ٌ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ). (‫)الالم‬ ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬‫د‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ – ‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫مءا‬ً ‫ء‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دا‬َ‫ءا‬Always Majroor – ‫ن‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫و‬ِّ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬‫ي‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬Does not accept tanween – ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ل‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬‫يدق‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬Does not accept alif laam -‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬)over there-(‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫كءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬ is a noun which is used to indicate/point to a place that is distant or far. ‫د ؟‬ٍ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬: ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ثءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬Where is Muhammad’s book? ‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫لف ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬It is on the table over there -‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ح‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬)under((‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ُّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ُ‫ْو‬) ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫كءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ظ‬َ‫ءا‬ /‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫كءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫كءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ is a noun of place and the ism that follows it is majroor. ُ‫ب ةْو‬َ‫ءا‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫دق‬ِ‫حْي‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ح‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬The bag is under the table 19
  • 20. The particle ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬ (O!) is used when we want to call somebody and the person we are calling is the ism which comes after this particle and it is known as ‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ (the one being called). There are 5 types of ‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬, we will study 3 for now. ‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ )١: ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫دا‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫م‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ (‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫بءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ، ‫دا‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫حءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ، ‫ا‬The first type is when we call somebody by their name i.e. O Muhammad!, Haamid!, ‘Abbaas!, and so on. )٢: ‫ة‬ُ‫ْو‬‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ص‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مدق‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ة‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ك‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ (‫ذ‬ُ‫ْو‬‫تءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫س‬‫س‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬ ‫سءا‬‫س‬‫ي‬َ‫ءا‬، ‫لا‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ج‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ، ‫ا‬The second type is when we call somebody and we intend a particular or specific person i.e. O Teacher!, Man!, and so on. )٣: ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ضءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ (‫لل‬َّ‫ى‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫ب‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫د‬ٍ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ءا‬‫خ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬، ‫ا‬The third type is when the one being called is mudhaaf i.e. O ‘Abdallaahi!, O Daughter of Khaalid!, and so on. It is important to note that the first and the second types of ‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ end in one dhamma, not tanween. As for the third type then the Mudhaaf will be ‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ص‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ (take Fathah on the last letter). The words ‫م‬ٌ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ and ‫ن‬ٌ ‫ب‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ begin with hamzatu l-wasl. When preceded by a word the kasrah (ِ‫ْي‬-) is dropped in pronunciation, i.e. ، ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ط‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ِّ ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬، ‫لا‬ٌ ‫بال‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ط‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ال‬‫ن‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ْ‫م‬‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ر‬ِّ ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ءا‬‫ط‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ٍ ‫بال‬ِ‫ْي‬ . 20 ‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫بءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫د ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ -‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫بءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ء‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ن‬ِّ ‫ال‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ -‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬ O- Particle of calling Abbaas- The one being called
  • 21. )٦‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫سءا‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ال‬ ‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ ( ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬‫ة‬ٌ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ك‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬This is an iron -‫ءا‬ْ‫هم‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َّ‫ى‬‫لل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬Letter to bring to attention or alert ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬َّ‫ى‬‫لل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ‫ء‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ (nouns of indication). ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬Noun of Indication ‫ذه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ is pronounced as ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫هءا‬َ‫ءا‬ but it is written without the first alif. The ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that have meaning such as ‫ة‬ٌ ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫قءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‘principle’ orٌ ‫ح ة‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ص‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ ‘advice’. -ٌ ‫ع ة‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬‫نءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ ‫ح ة‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ص‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬This advice is beneficial. The table below shows the properties of ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ . Indicates,points to ‫لف ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ة‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ the near ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دق‬َ‫لءا‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ the feminine ‫ث‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ى‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ the singular or (non-intelligent plurals) ‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ The ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ is ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ (definite). It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ق‬ِ‫ْي‬‫عءا‬َ‫ءا‬ or things that do not possess intellect ‫ل‬ٍ ‫ق‬ِ‫ْي‬‫عءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫غ‬َ‫ءا‬ . 21
  • 22. -Generally words ending in ‫ة‬ (taa marboota) are regarded as feminine so when we indicate to them we use the ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬. However there are exceptions to this, (refer to lesson 4 under ‘types of femininity’). ‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫يءا‬َّ‫ى‬‫س‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ : ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ثءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ة‬ٌ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫را‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫د‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬‫ ة‬ٌ This is a car and this is a bike. -Body parts that are in pairs are regarded as feminine. ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ : ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ثءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ن‬ٌ ‫ذ‬ُ‫ْو‬‫أ‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬‫ن‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬This is an ear and this is an eye -Also words which are particular to females are regarded as feminine. ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ : ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ثءا‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫خ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫اإل‬This is the engineer’s sister and this is the imaam’s daughter. ‫ر‬ِّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ - ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬Particle of Jarr (for, belongs to( , The particle of jarr ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ enters upon an ism and causes it to take ‫ر‬ُّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ (kasrah). ‫ل‬‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه ؟‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ِ‫ْي‬‫ل‬‫ر‬ٍ ‫س‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫يءا‬َ‫ءا‬ِ‫ْي‬Whose is this? This belongs to Yaasir. ‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬‫لل‬ِ‫ْي‬ِّ All Praise belongs to Allaah Note that the word ‫لل‬ُّ ‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ becomes ‫لل‬ِ‫ْي‬ِّ by just dropping the alif and no laam will need to be added to the word. 22
  • 23. )٧‫ع‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫سءا‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ال‬ ‫س‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ى‬‫(ال‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ -Noun of Indication ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ ‫ب ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ط‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬ٌ ‫ض ة‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ِّ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬This a doctor and that is a nurse. ‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people that are distant/far and feminine. ‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬can be broken down into three parts: ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إلشءا‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ا‬ِ‫ْي‬ -‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬Noun of indication ‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬‫الال‬َ‫ءا‬ – ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬The laam is for the far/distant ‫ب‬ٌ ‫طءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫خ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ -‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬Particle of address Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ’ particle of address also indicates upon far/distant and the ‘‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ’ shows upon even more or increased furtherness/distance. The letter/particle of address ‘‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ’ is used if the person or objectwe are addressing is masculine. The table below shows the properties of ‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬ : Indicates,points to ‫لف ى‬َ‫ءا‬‫إ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ة‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ The far/distant ‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ The feminine ‫ث‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ى‬‫ؤ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ The singular ‫د‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ All the ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ nouns of indication are ‫ف ة‬َ‫ءا‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ definite. The letter ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ in ‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬ is dropped when joined to the laam and kaaf and the laam takes a sukoon ‫لك‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬. 23
  • 24. ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬ ‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ع‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬َ‫ءا‬‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دق‬َ‫لءا‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ة‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ر‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫شءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ء‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬َ‫ءا‬‫د‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫حءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ذا‬َ‫ءا‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬‫د‬ٌ ‫م‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ح‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫م‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ت‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬َ‫ءا‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ز‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ُ‫ن ةْو‬َ‫ءا‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫آ‬ Al-I’raab-‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫را‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫اإل‬َ‫ءا‬ : ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ ‫سءا‬‫س‬‫ه‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ ة‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬‫خ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫دا‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫تال‬ِ‫ْي‬‫خ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫س‬‫س‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ك‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬ ‫ر‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫خ‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫س‬‫س‬‫ي‬ْ‫م‬‫ي‬ِ‫ْي‬‫غ‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ت‬َ‫ءا‬ : ‫و‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ه‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫را‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ .‫ا‬ً‫ير‬ْ‫م‬‫د‬ِ‫ْي‬‫تدق‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ءا‬ً‫فاظ‬ْ‫م‬‫ل‬َ‫ءا‬ The Definition: The I’raab is: Changing of the endings of the words because of the changing of the active elements entering upon them (the change is) apparent or not-apparent. ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬‫س‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫حءال‬َ‫ءا‬ The cases of the ism ‫ي ة‬َّ‫ى‬‫ل‬ِ‫ْي‬‫ص‬ْ‫م‬ ‫األ‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫را‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫مءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫عال‬َ‫ءا‬ ُ‫ْو‬ The origin signs of ‘Iraab ‫ب‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫را‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫م‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ع‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫أ‬َ‫ءا‬ Types of ‘Iraab ‫ع‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ف‬ُ‫ْو‬‫ر‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٌ - /-ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ع‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ف‬ْ‫م‬‫ر‬َّ‫ى‬ ‫ال‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ص‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫م‬‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ -ً/ َ‫ءا‬- ‫ب‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ص‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ى‬‫ال‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ج‬ْ‫م‬ ‫م‬َ‫ءا‬ ٍ- / ِ‫ْي‬- ‫ر‬ُّ ‫ج‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ The above definition for I’raab mentions the ending of words changing what is meant by this is the changing of vowel markings that are on the end or last letter of a word. It also mentions that it is the active elements that enter upon a word that cause the change at the ending of a word, an example of active elements are the ‫ف‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫م‬ ‫ر‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫ح‬ُ‫ْو‬ (letters/particles). The active element is called ‫ل‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫عءا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬ (al-‘aamil) in Arabic and the plural is ‫ل‬ُ‫ْو‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ْي‬ ‫وا‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ع‬َ‫ءا‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫م‬‫ا‬َ‫ءا‬. 24
  • 25. The definition also mentions that the change of a word can be apparent or not apparent. What is meant by ‫ا‬َ ‫فاظ‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ apparent change is when the vowel markings at the end of a word can be pronounced and when the vowel markings at the end of a word cannot be pronounced then the change is ‫ر ا‬ً‫ ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫تدق‬َ not apparent. This part will be explained in more depth later. The table above illustrates types of I’raab and its origin signs. ‫ع‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ (ar-raf’u) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a dhammah or dhammataan ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ت‬ٌ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ /‫ت‬ُ ) ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ص‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ ال‬(an-nasbu) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a fatha or fathataan ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫تا‬‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ / ً‫ ا‬‫ت‬َ ‫ر‬ُّ ‫ج‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (al-jarru) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a khasrah or khasrataan ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ت‬ٍ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ /‫ت‬ِ‫ي‬ Also when an ism is in the state of ‫ع‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ (ar-raf’u) it is called ‫ع‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ُ )‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ (marfoo’). When an ism is in the state of ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ص‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫ ال‬ (an-nasbu) it is called ‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ mansoob). When an ism is in the state of ‫ر‬ُّ ‫ج‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (al-jarru) it is called ‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ (majroor). ( ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ( ‫ه‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ع‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ ‫ض‬ٍ ‫ما‬َ ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ز‬َ ‫ح‬َ ‫ب‬َ َ ‫ذ‬ : ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ثا‬َ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬‫د‬ٌ‫ج‬َ ‫جا‬َ ‫د‬َّ‫ ال‬‫ة‬‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫بال‬ِ‫ي‬ َ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬Zayd slaughtered the chicken with the knife. ( ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ( ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ح‬َ 25
  • 26. ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ع‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫فا‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬‫ع‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ُ )‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ The example above shows the three types of I’raab , ‫د‬ٌ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ز‬َ is ‫ع‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ُ )‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ (active element) which is causing it to be ‫ع‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ُ )‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ is the ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ض‬ٍ ‫ما‬َ (past tense verb) ‫ح‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ذ‬َ ,‫جة‬َ ‫جا‬َ ‫د‬َّ‫ ال‬ َ is ‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ (active element) which is causing it to be ‫ب‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ is the ‫ض‬ٍ ‫ما‬َ ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ي‬ (past tense verb) ‫ين‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫س‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ ال‬ ,‫ح‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ذ‬َ ِ‫ي‬(knife) is ‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ (active element) which is causing it to be ‫ر‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ is the ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬ ) ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ح‬َ ) . The words which fall into the definition of I’raab as mentioned above are known in Arabic as ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) (mu’rab). ‫ء‬ُ ) ‫نا‬َ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬(al-binaa) ‫ء‬ُ ) ‫نا‬َ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬‫ ال‬ (al-binaa) are words which do not show change in their endings and they are considered by the grammarians to be the opposite of words which take ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ر ا‬َ ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬ (al-I’raab), as mentioned above. The words which fall into this category are called ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ (mabni). ‫ي‬ِّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َ .‫ها‬َ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ة‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬َ ‫خ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫د ا‬َّ‫ ال‬ ‫ل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫و ا‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ب‬َ ‫س‬َ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ه‬ُ )‫ر‬ُ ) ‫خ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫آ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ي‬َّ‫غ‬َ ‫ت‬َ ‫ي‬َ ‫ل‬ ‫ما‬َ : ِ‫ي‬ Definition of ‫ي‬ٍّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ (mabniyy): That which it’s ending doesn’t change because of the active elements entering upon it. The definition explains that words which are ‫ي‬ِّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ their endings do not change because of the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫و ا‬َ ‫ع‬َ (active elements) entering upon them, but rather they are built upon one ending which doesn’t change at all. However, these words can grammatically have a place in I’raab but they will be in the position or state of ‫ر‬ُّ ‫ج‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬،‫با‬ُ ) ‫ص‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ن‬َّ‫عا، ال‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ due to their place in the sentence. This point will be elaborated upon later. 26
  • 27. ..... ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ Built upon…… ‫ثلة‬ِ‫ي‬‫م‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫أ‬ ٌ Examples ‫ء‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫نا‬َ ‫ب‬ِ‫ي‬‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ع‬ُ ) ‫و ا‬َ ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫أ‬ Types of Al-binaa ‫للللل ى‬‫ل‬‫ل‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫للللل‬‫ل‬‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ ‫ن‬ٍ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ف‬ِ‫ي‬ ،‫ما‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ع‬َ ‫ن‬َ ،‫ اا‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ذ‬‫ه‬ ،‫نا‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ -ْ‫اظ‬ -‫ن‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ة‬ٍ ‫م‬َّ ‫ض‬َ ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ ‫ث‬ُ ) ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ح‬َ ،‫نا‬ُ ) ‫ح‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ن‬َ -ُ ) -ٌ‫مة‬َّ ‫ض‬َ ‫ة‬ٍ ‫ح‬َ ‫ت‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ف‬َ ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ ‫ت‬َ ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫أ‬ ،‫با‬َ ‫ه‬َ ‫ذ‬َ ،‫نا‬َ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫أ‬ -َ - ٌ‫حة‬َ ‫ت‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ف‬َ ‫ة‬ٍ‫ر‬َ ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬َ ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ ‫ء‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ؤل‬ُ ) ‫ه‬َ ،‫لا‬ِ‫ي‬ ،‫تا‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫أ‬ ،‫ها‬ِ‫ي‬‫ذ‬ِ‫ي‬‫ه‬َ -ِ‫ي‬ -ٌ‫رة‬َ ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬َ The table above shows that words which are ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ can fall into four types of endings which do not change due to the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫و ا‬َ ‫ع‬َ entering upon them, rather they are fixed or built upon that particular ending. There are four possible endings, ‫رة‬َ ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬َ ،‫حةا‬َ ‫ت‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ف‬َ ،‫مةا‬َّ ‫ض‬َ ،‫نا‬ٌ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ ) . ‫ه‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ ‫إ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضا‬َ ‫م‬ُ ) ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضا‬َ ‫م‬ُ ) ‫م‬َ ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫تا‬َ ‫ك‬ِ‫ي‬ : ‫ل‬ٌ ‫ثا‬َ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫هذ ا؟‬Whose book is this? ‫ن‬ٍ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ The above example shows that the word ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ is ‫ه‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ ‫إ‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ضا‬َ ‫م‬ُ ) and we know that the mudhaaf ilaih is always majroor (takes kasrah), however the word ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬َ (who) is ‫ن‬ٍ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ك‬ُ ) ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ل ى‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ (built upon a sukoon) so the ending will always show a sukoon even though it is in the position or state of ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (al-jarr) due to its place in the sentence. So the ‫ل‬ٌ ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫عا‬َ (active element) does not affect the ending of a word that is ‫ي‬ٌّ ‫ن‬ِ‫ي‬‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ (mabni). 27
  • 28. )٨‫ن‬ُ ) ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ الثا‬ ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫د‬َّ‫ ال‬ ( ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬-(Badal-al) ‫دأ‬َ ‫ت‬َ ‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬ُ ) ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬‫بر‬َ ‫خ‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ُ ) ‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ُ ) ‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬.‫ر‬ٌ ‫ج‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫تا‬َ This man is a trader. ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬)al-badal( In the above example the ism ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ُ ) ‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ is grammatically known as ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (al-badal), it used in a sentence in order to give ‫د‬ٌ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َ (emphasis) and ‫ن‬ٌ ‫يا‬َ ‫ب‬َ (clarity or explanation) to the word that precedes it. So in the above example the ism ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫ج‬ُ ) ‫ر‬َّ ‫ ال‬ is giving emphasis and clarity to the word ‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬َ , it is telling us that the one being indicated to is ‘the man’.It can also be understood that the badal is the same the thing as the word which precedes it, i.e. the man is the one being indicated to and the one being indicated to is the man. Another example can be used to explain this, if I had a book in my hand which I was indicating to and I said to my teacher, ‘this is new’ '‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬َ ‫د‬ٌ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫ج‬َ '. It would be understood that the book is new and if I was to mention the book in my sentence I would say in Arabic,‫ب‬ُ ) ‫كتا‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬َ ‫د‬ٌ‫ي‬ِ‫ي‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫ج‬َ . By mentioning '‫ب‬ُ ) ‫كتا‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬', I have put a ‫دة‬َ ‫يا‬َ ‫ز‬ِ‫ي‬ ٌ(extra or additional word in the sentence which is known as ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ (al-badal). It is important to note here that if I were to say in Arabic, ‘‫ب‬ُ ) ‫كتا‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ذ ا‬َ ‫ه‬َ ’ this would not be considered to be a complete or beneficial sentence. To make it a beneficial sentence we must add a ‫ر‬ٌ ‫ب‬َ ‫خ‬َ (khabar), as shown in the example 28
  • 29. above. The subject of ‫ل‬ُ ) ‫د‬َ ‫ب‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ and the types of al-badal will be covered later on inshaallaah. ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫مدق‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬‫ر‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫مدق‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬ ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ل‬‫ل‬‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫س‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫د‬َ ‫م‬ُ ) ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬َ ‫لا‬‫ل‬‫ك‬َ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬ِ‫ي‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫م‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫أ‬َ ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ل‬‫ل‬‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ل‬ِ‫ي‬‫لا‬‫ل‬‫ط‬َّ ‫ ال‬ ‫و‬َ ‫ر‬َّ ‫ل‬‫ل‬‫ت‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬َ ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫إ‬ِ‫ي‬.‫ ا‬The teacher is from America and the student is from England. ‫ل ى‬َ ‫إ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ب‬َ ‫ه‬َ ‫ذ‬َ ‫د‬ٌ‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫حا‬َ ‫ف ى‬َ ‫ش‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َ ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬.Hamid went to the hospital. ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫مدق‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬ : ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َّ‫ ال‬ٌ‫حة‬َ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬ُ )‫ف‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬َ ٌ‫مة‬َ ‫ز‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ل‬َ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ل‬ِ‫ي‬‫أ‬َ ‫ه‬ُ )‫ر‬ُ ) ‫خ‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫آ‬ ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) ‫م‬ٌ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ ا‬ ‫و‬َ ‫ه‬ُ ) ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ص‬ُ ) ‫مدق‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫م‬ُ )‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬ .‫ت‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫كا‬َ ‫ر‬َ ‫ح‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ع‬ُ ) ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫م‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ج‬َ ‫ه‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ل‬َ ‫ع‬َ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫د‬َّ‫دق‬َ ‫ت‬ُ ) ‫و‬َ ‫ها‬َ ‫ل‬َ ‫ب‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ق‬َ ‫ما‬َ Definition: al-ismul-maqsoor, it is an ism mu’rab which has an inseparable or binding alif on its end and the letter before it takes a fatha and all the vowel markings on it are not apparent. The words ‫ف ى‬َ ‫ش‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ت‬َ ‫س‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) ،‫ر اا‬َّ ‫ت‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ك‬َ ‫ن‬ْ‫اظ‬‫إ‬ِ‫ي‬،‫س ىا‬َ ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) ،‫كاا‬َ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ر‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫م‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫أ‬َ all end with an binding alif or the letter ‫ى‬ which looks like the letter ‫ي‬ (ya) except that it doesn’t have the two dots but it is pronounced as an alif. Also the ismul-maqsoor is ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ر‬َ ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫م‬ُ ) (mu’rab) it takes ‫ب‬ُ ) ‫ر ا‬َ ‫ع‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫إل‬ِ‫ي‬ ‫ ا‬َ (al-I’raab) but the I’raab is ‫ر‬ٌ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫تدق‬َ (taqdeer) not apparent. The examples above illustrate this, the ismul- maqsoor (nouns ending with the binding alif at the end) are preceded by ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ح‬ُ ) but the change caused by the ‫ر‬ِّ‫ْي‬ ‫ج‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬ ‫ف‬ُ ) ‫و‬ْ‫اظ‬ ‫ر‬ُ ) ‫ح‬ُ ) is not apparent, the case of ‫ر‬ُّ ‫ج‬َ ‫ل‬ْ‫اظ‬‫ ا‬َ (al-jarr) cannot be seen. The Ismul-maqsoor falls into one of the categories or types of words where the I’raab is ‫ر ا‬ً‫ ا‬ ‫ي‬ْ‫اظ‬‫د‬ِ‫ي‬‫تدق‬َ (please refer back to the definition of I’raab). 29
  • 30. 30